WO2024032371A1 - 通信方法及相关装置 - Google Patents

通信方法及相关装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024032371A1
WO2024032371A1 PCT/CN2023/109235 CN2023109235W WO2024032371A1 WO 2024032371 A1 WO2024032371 A1 WO 2024032371A1 CN 2023109235 W CN2023109235 W CN 2023109235W WO 2024032371 A1 WO2024032371 A1 WO 2024032371A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
trp
resource
information
terminal device
network device
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2023/109235
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
顾志方
酉春华
范强
袁世通
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2024032371A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024032371A1/zh

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/02Arrangements for optimising operational condition
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W56/00Synchronisation arrangements

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular, to a communication method and related devices.
  • multiple transmission reception points can provide communication services for user equipment (UE).
  • Multiple TRPs are multiple antennas separated in physical locations or multiple antenna arrays on the same antenna, forming multiple TRPs (i.e. mTRP), forming different spatial channels, and forming maximum beamforming through the irrelevance of spatial channels. Gain or spatial diversity reliability gain to enhance coverage or reliability.
  • Timing advance refers to the timing advance of the UE sending an uplink signal to the network device, that is, the UE determines the time to send the uplink signal based on the TA.
  • TA Timing advance
  • multiple TRPs correspond to a common TA, that is, the UE sends uplink signals to mTRP based on a common TA. This method of sending uplink signals has low accuracy.
  • This application provides a communication method and related devices, which can improve the accuracy of uplink signal transmission.
  • the present application provides a communication method, which is applicable to a terminal device or a chip in the terminal device.
  • the following description takes the terminal device as the execution subject of the method as an example, wherein the terminal device has obtained the first transmission
  • the first timing of TRP communication at the receiving point is advanced by TA.
  • the method includes:
  • the terminal device obtains the configuration information of the first resource from the network device and the information indicating the acquisition of TA;
  • the terminal device uses the first resource to send the information of the second TA used to determine the second TRP to the network device according to the information indicating the acquisition of the TA;
  • the terminal device receives information from the network device indicating the second TA, the second TA being used for the terminal device to communicate with the second TRP.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device has acquired the first TA communicating with the first TRP (that is, the terminal device has performed a single TRP transmission), if the network device determines that the terminal device is suitable for mTRP transmission, the network device may instruct the terminal device Perform mTRP transmission and instruct the terminal device to obtain the second TA corresponding to the second TRP. Among them, after the terminal device obtains the second TA, in subsequent communications, the terminal device can send signals to different TRPs with accurate uplink transmission time.
  • the terminal device obtains the configuration information of the first resource from the network device and the information indicating to obtain the TA, including:
  • the terminal device obtains a configuration message for multi-transmission reception point mTRP transmission from the network device.
  • the configuration message for mTRP transmission includes the configuration information of the first resource and the information indicating acquisition of TA.
  • the network device can deliver the configuration information of the first resource and the information indicating the acquisition of the TA through one message (that is, the configuration message transmitted by mTRP), which can save signaling overhead.
  • the terminal device obtains the configuration information of the first resource from the network device and the information indicating to obtain the TA, including:
  • the terminal device obtains a configuration message for multi-transmission reception point mTRP transmission from the network device.
  • the configuration message for mTRP transmission includes the corresponding relationship between the first resource and the second TRP and the instruction for obtaining TA information, the corresponding relationship between the first resource and the second TRP includes the configuration information of the first resource and the identification information of the second TRP;
  • the method also includes:
  • the terminal device determines that the second TA corresponds to the second TRP based on the corresponding relationship between the first resource and the second TRP.
  • the configuration message transmitted by mTRP includes the corresponding relationship between the first resource and the second TRP, which is helpful for subsequent terminal devices to determine the subsequently received second TA based on the corresponding relationship between the first resource and the second TRP. Corresponds to the second TRP.
  • the terminal device obtains the configuration information of the first resource from the network device and the information indicating to obtain the TA, including:
  • the terminal device receives a first message from the network device, the first message includes configuration information of one or more resources, and the one or more resources include the first resource;
  • the terminal device receives a second message from the network device, where the second message includes information indicating to obtain the TA.
  • the network device can send the configuration information of the first resource and the information used to instruct the acquisition of the TA through two messages.
  • the first message carries the configuration information of one or more resources
  • the second message carries the username and password.
  • this method of indicating the configuration information of the first resource and instructing to obtain TA information through two messages respectively is more flexible.
  • the first message is a configuration message for mTRP transmission
  • the second message is a physical downlink control channel command PDCCH order.
  • the first message further includes a correspondence between the first resource and the second TRP, and the correspondence between the first resource and the second TRP includes the first resource.
  • the method also includes:
  • the terminal device determines that the second TA corresponds to the second TRP based on the corresponding relationship between the first resource and the second TRP.
  • the first message also includes the corresponding relationship between the first resource and the second TRP, which is helpful for the subsequent terminal device to determine the subsequently received message based on the corresponding relationship between the first resource and the second TRP.
  • the second TA corresponds to the second TRP.
  • the second message further includes a correspondence between the first resource and the second TRP, and the correspondence between the first resource and the second TRP includes the first resource.
  • the method also includes:
  • the terminal device determines that the second TA corresponds to the second TRP based on the corresponding relationship between the first resource and the second TRP.
  • the second message also includes the corresponding relationship between the first resource and the second TRP, which is helpful for the subsequent terminal device to determine the subsequently received second message based on the corresponding relationship between the first resource and the second TRP.
  • TA corresponds to the second TRP.
  • the terminal device receives information from the network device indicating the second TA, including:
  • the terminal device receives the corresponding relationship between the second TA and the second TRP from the network device, and the corresponding relationship between the second TA and the second TRP includes a message indicating the second TA. information and the identification information of the second TRP;
  • the method also includes:
  • the terminal device determines that the second TA corresponds to the second TRP based on the corresponding relationship between the second TA and the second TRP.
  • the network device when the network device delivers the information of the second TA, it also delivers the identification information of the second TRP, which is helpful for subsequent terminal devices to identify that the received second TA corresponds to the second TRP.
  • the first resource is any one of the following:
  • Beams, random access resources, or sounding reference signal SRS resources are Beams, random access resources, or sounding reference signal SRS resources.
  • the method further includes:
  • the terminal device receives an adjustment command from the network device.
  • the adjustment command includes identification information of the second TRP and TA update information corresponding to the second TRP.
  • the TA update information is used to update the The second TA.
  • the TA corresponding to multiple TRPs can be updated and maintained through adjustment commands.
  • the adjustment command can include the identification information of the second TRP and the second TRP.
  • the TA update information corresponding to the TRP so the terminal device can determine that the adjustment command is an adjustment command for the TA corresponding to the second TRP based on the identification information of the second TRP, and then can update the second TA based on the TA update information corresponding to the second TRP.
  • the configuration information transmitted by the mTRP also includes at least one of the following configuration information of the second resource corresponding to the second TRP:
  • Configuration information of the physical downlink control channel PDCCH resources Configuration information of the physical downlink control channel PDCCH resources, configuration information of the physical uplink control channel PUCCH resources, configuration information of the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH resources used for semi-static channel state information reporting, configuration information of downlink allocated resources, and uplink authorized resources Configuration information, configuration information of beams and/or beam sets, configuration information of resources corresponding to uplink reference signals.
  • the method further includes:
  • the terminal device uses the second resource to receive an adjustment command from the network device.
  • the adjustment command includes TA update information corresponding to the second TRP, and the TA update information is used to update the second TA. ;
  • the terminal device determines that the adjustment command corresponds to the second TRP according to the corresponding relationship between the second resource and the second TRP, and the corresponding relationship between the second resource and the second TRP includes the Configuration information of the second resource and identification information of the second TRP.
  • the adjustment command can be distinguished through resources as an adjustment of the TA of which TRP. Therefore, a more accurate TA value can be obtained, which is beneficial to improving the accuracy of sending uplink signals.
  • the first TRP corresponds to a first timer
  • the second TRP corresponds to a second timer
  • the method also includes:
  • the terminal device When the first timer has not expired and the second timer has expired, the terminal device performs at least one of the following operations:
  • the terminal device clears the cache of the Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request HARQ process corresponding to the second TRP;
  • the terminal equipment releases the PUCCH resources corresponding to the second TRP and/or the resources corresponding to the uplink reference signal;
  • the terminal device clears the preconfigured downlink allocation resources and uplink authorization resources corresponding to the second TRP;
  • the terminal equipment clears the PUSCH resources associated with the second TRP and used for semi-static channel state information reporting;
  • the terminal device maintains the second TA
  • the terminal device sends indication information to the network device according to the first TA, where the indication information is used to indicate the failure of the second TA.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device recognizes that the TA of some TRPs is invalid/the uplink is out of sync, it can immediately notify the network device of the out of sync information through the TA valid/uplink synchronized TRP, so that the network can promptly restore the UE's uplink. to the synchronization state, restore the mTRP transmission state, and improve reliability and transmission capacity.
  • the terminal device sends indication information to the network device according to the first TA, including:
  • the terminal device When the amount of data to be sent in the terminal device is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the terminal device sends the indication information to the network device according to the first TA.
  • the terminal device may not report immediately when discovering that the second TA corresponding to the second TRP is invalid, but wait until the amount of data to be sent in the terminal device exceeds the first threshold, and then based on the first
  • the TA sends indication information to inform the network device that the TA corresponding to the second TRP is invalid.
  • the network device can be notified in time that the uplink of the terminal device is out of sync.
  • the network device can subsequently Re-instruct the terminal to obtain the second TA information.
  • the first TRP and the second TRP correspond to the same cell, or the first TRP and the second TRP correspond to different cells.
  • the solution in this application can be applied to a variety of scenarios, such as Intra-cell mTRP scenarios (i.e., the first TRP and the second TRP correspond to the same cell) and Inter-cell mTRP scenarios (i.e., the first TRP and the second TRP Corresponding to different communities), strong applicability.
  • the first TRP and the second TRP correspond to different cells, the first TRP corresponds to the source cell, and the second TRP corresponds to the target cell;
  • the method further includes:
  • the terminal device receives a handover command from the source cell
  • the terminal equipment switches from the source cell to the target cell according to the switching command, and the switching command indicates using the second TA in the target cell.
  • this application can also be extended to mobility handover scenarios (ie, cell handover scenarios), further improving the scope of application of the solution.
  • the information indicating the second TA includes any of the following:
  • the value of the second TA or the difference information between the value of the first TA and the value of the second TA.
  • the network device may directly indicate the value of the second TA, or may also indicate the difference information.
  • the network device indicates the difference information, fewer bits can be used to complete the indication, which is beneficial to saving signaling overhead.
  • the information indicating the second TA is carried in a random access response message, or the information indicating the second TA is carried in a media access control unit MAC CE.
  • the information used to determine the second TA of the second TRP includes any of the following:
  • Preamble or SRS.
  • the method further includes:
  • the terminal device releases the first resource.
  • the terminal device releases the first resource, which is conducive to the network device recovering the resource in time for use by other terminal devices that need to use the first resource.
  • this application provides a communication method, which method is suitable for network equipment or chips in network equipment.
  • the following description takes the network equipment as the execution subject of the method as an example.
  • the method includes:
  • the network device sends the first timing advance TA corresponding to the first transmission reception point TRP to the terminal device, and the first TA is used for the terminal device to communicate with the first TRP;
  • the network device sends the configuration information of the first resource and information indicating the acquisition of the TA to the terminal device;
  • the network device receives the information for determining the second TA of the second TRP sent by the terminal device using the first resource in response to the information for instructing to obtain the TA;
  • the network device sends information indicating the second TA to the terminal device, and the second TA is used between the terminal device and the Second TRP communication.
  • the network device sends the configuration information of the first resource and the information indicating to obtain the TA to the terminal device, including:
  • the network device sends a configuration message for multi-transmission reception point mTRP transmission to the terminal device, where the configuration message for mTRP transmission includes configuration information of the first resource and information used to indicate obtaining a TA.
  • the network device sends the configuration information of the first resource and the information indicating to obtain the TA to the terminal device, including:
  • the network device sends a configuration message for multi-transmission reception point mTRP transmission to the terminal device.
  • the configuration message for mTRP transmission includes the corresponding relationship between the first resource and the second TRP and the instruction for obtaining TA.
  • the corresponding relationship between the first resource and the second TRP includes the configuration information of the first resource and the identification information of the second TRP.
  • the network device sends the configuration information of the first resource and the information indicating to obtain the TA to the terminal device, including:
  • the network device sends a first message to the terminal device, the first message includes configuration information of one or more resources, and the one or more resources include the first resource;
  • the network device sends a second message to the terminal device, where the second message includes information indicating to obtain the TA.
  • the first message is a configuration message for mTRP transmission
  • the second message is a physical downlink control channel command PDCCH order.
  • the first message further includes a correspondence between the first resource and the second TRP, and the correspondence between the first resource and the second TRP includes the first resource. configuration information and identification information of the second TRP.
  • the second message further includes a correspondence between the first resource and the second TRP, and the correspondence between the first resource and the second TRP includes the first resource.
  • the indication information and the identification information of the second TRP are included in the second message.
  • the network device sends information indicating the second TA to the terminal device, including:
  • the network device sends the corresponding relationship between the second TA and the second TRP to the terminal device, where the corresponding relationship between the second TA and the second TRP includes information indicating the second TA. and the identification information of the second TRP.
  • the first resource is any one of the following:
  • Beams, random access resources, or sounding reference signal SRS resources are Beams, random access resources, or sounding reference signal SRS resources.
  • the method further includes:
  • the network device sends an adjustment command to the terminal device.
  • the adjustment command includes identification information of the second TRP and TA update information corresponding to the second TRP.
  • the TA update information is used to update the third TRP. Two TA.
  • the configuration information transmitted by the mTRP also includes at least one of the following configuration information of the second resource corresponding to the second TRP:
  • Configuration information of the physical downlink control channel PDCCH resources Configuration information of the physical downlink control channel PDCCH resources, configuration information of the physical uplink control channel PUCCH resources, configuration information of the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH resources used for semi-static channel state information reporting, configuration information of downlink allocated resources, and uplink authorized resources Configuration information, configuration information of beams and/or beam sets, configuration information of resources corresponding to uplink reference signals.
  • the method further includes:
  • the network device uses the second resource to send an adjustment command to the terminal device, where the adjustment command includes TA update information corresponding to the second TRP, and the TA update information is used to update the second TA.
  • the method further includes:
  • the network device receives indication information from the terminal device, where the indication information is used to indicate that the second TA fails.
  • the first TRP and the second TRP correspond to the same cell, or the first TRP and the second TRP correspond to different cells.
  • the information indicating the second TA includes any of the following:
  • the value of the second TA or the difference information between the value of the first TA and the value of the second TA.
  • the information indicating the second TA is carried in a random access response message, or the information indicating the second TA is carried in a media access control unit MAC CE.
  • the information used to determine the second TA of the second TRP includes any of the following:
  • Preamble or SRS.
  • this application provides a communication method, which is suitable for terminal equipment or chips in the terminal equipment.
  • the terminal equipment Take the execution subject of the method as an example for explanation.
  • the method includes:
  • the terminal device receives configuration information of the third resource corresponding to the first TRP and configuration information of the first resource corresponding to the second TRP from the network device;
  • the terminal device uses the third resource to send information for determining the first TA of the first TRP to the first TRP, and uses the first resource to send to the second TRP information for determining the first TA.
  • the terminal device receives information indicating the first TA and information indicating the second TA from the network device.
  • the terminal device can obtain the TA corresponding to each TRP in multiple TRRs at the same time. Therefore, in subsequent communications, the terminal device can send signals to different TRPs with accurate uplink transmission time.
  • the terminal device receives configuration information of the third resource corresponding to the first TRP and configuration information of the first resource corresponding to the second TRP from the network device, including:
  • the terminal device receives a switching command from the network device, where the switching command includes configuration information of the third resource corresponding to the first TRP and configuration information of the first resource corresponding to the second TRP.
  • the switching command includes configuration information of the third resource corresponding to the first TRP and configuration information of the first resource corresponding to the second TRP.
  • the switching command further includes a corresponding relationship between the third resource and the first TRP, and a corresponding relationship between the first resource and the second TRP; wherein, the third resource
  • the corresponding relationship between the three resources and the first TRP includes the configuration information of the third resource and the identification information of the first TRP.
  • the corresponding relationship between the first resource and the second TRP includes the first resource.
  • the method also includes:
  • the terminal device determines that the first TA corresponds to the first TRP based on the corresponding relationship between the third resource and the first TRP;
  • the terminal device determines that the second TA corresponds to the second TRP based on the corresponding relationship between the first resource and the second TRP.
  • the network device delivers the corresponding relationship between the third resource and the first TRP, and the corresponding relationship between the first resource and the second TRP, which is beneficial to subsequent terminal devices according to the third resource and the third TRP. Based on the corresponding relationship between a TRP, it is determined that the first TA received subsequently corresponds to the first TRP, and based on the corresponding relationship between the first resource and the second TRP, it is determined that the second TA received subsequently corresponds to the second TRP.
  • the terminal device receives information indicating the first TA and information indicating the second TA from the network device, including:
  • the terminal device receives a third message from the network device, where the third message includes information indicating the first TA and information indicating the second TA.
  • the network device simultaneously carries information indicating the first TA and information indicating the second TA through one message, which is beneficial to saving signaling overhead.
  • the third message also includes the corresponding relationship between the first TA and the first TRP, and the corresponding relationship between the second TA and the second TRP; wherein, the first TA
  • the corresponding relationship with the first TRP includes information indicating the first TA and the identification information of the first TRP.
  • the corresponding relationship between the second TA and the second TRP includes information indicating the second TRP. TA information and the identification information of the second TRP;
  • the method also includes:
  • the terminal device determines that the first TA corresponds to the first TRP based on the corresponding relationship between the first TA and the first TRP;
  • the terminal device determines that the second TA corresponds to the second TRP based on the corresponding relationship between the second TA and the second TRP.
  • the terminal device receives information indicating the first TA and information indicating the second TA from the network device, including:
  • the terminal device receives a fourth message from the network device, the fourth message including information indicating the first TA;
  • the terminal device receives a fifth message from the network device, the fifth message including information indicating the second TA.
  • the network device can send information indicating the first TA and information indicating the second TA through two messages.
  • the fourth message carries information indicating the first TA
  • the fifth message carries information indicating the second TA. information, which will help improve the efficiency of TA delivery.
  • the two TRPs are on two network devices, then if they are delivered through two messages, there is no need for the network devices of the first TRP and the second TRP to interact. , the two devices can directly send it to the terminal device, the processing time is faster, and the process of network device interaction is saved.
  • the fourth message also includes a corresponding relationship between the first TA and the first TRP, where the first TA The corresponding relationship with the first TRP includes information indicating the first TA and the identification information of the first TRP;
  • the fifth message also includes the corresponding relationship between the second TA and the second TRP, where The corresponding relationship between the second TA and the second TRP includes information indicating the second TA and identification information of the second TRP;
  • the method also includes:
  • the terminal device determines that the first TA corresponds to the first TRP based on the corresponding relationship between the first TA and the first TRP;
  • the terminal device determines that the second TA corresponds to the second TRP based on the corresponding relationship between the second TA and the second TRP.
  • the fourth message carries the correspondence between the third resource and the first TRP
  • the fifth message carries the correspondence between the first resource and the second TRP. relationship, which is conducive to subsequent terminal equipment determining that the subsequently received first TA corresponds to the first TRP based on the corresponding relationship between the third resource and the first TRP, and determining that the subsequently received first TA corresponds to the first TRP based on the corresponding relationship between the first resource and the second TRP.
  • the second TA corresponds to the second TRP.
  • the first resource or the third resource is any one of the following:
  • Beams, random access resources, or sounding reference signal SRS resources are Beams, random access resources, or sounding reference signal SRS resources.
  • the present application provides a communication method, which method is suitable for network equipment or chips in the network equipment.
  • the following description takes the network equipment as the execution subject of the method as an example.
  • the method includes:
  • the network device sends the configuration information of the third resource corresponding to the first TRP and the configuration information of the first resource corresponding to the second TRP to the terminal device;
  • the network device receives information from the terminal device for determining the first TA of the first TRP through the first TRP, and receives information from the terminal device for determining the first TA through the second TRP. Information about the second TA of the second TRP;
  • the network device sends information indicating the first TA and information indicating the second TA to the terminal device.
  • the network device sends the configuration information of the third resource corresponding to the first TRP and the configuration information of the first resource corresponding to the second TRP to the terminal device, including:
  • the network device sends a switching command to the terminal device, where the switching command includes configuration information of the third resource corresponding to the first TRP and configuration information of the first resource corresponding to the second TRP.
  • the switching command further includes a corresponding relationship between the third resource and the first TRP, and a corresponding relationship between the first resource and the second TRP; wherein, the third resource
  • the corresponding relationship between the three resources and the first TRP includes the configuration information of the third resource and the identification information of the first TRP.
  • the corresponding relationship between the first resource and the second TRP includes the first resource. configuration information and identification information of the second TRP.
  • the network device sends information indicating the first TA and information indicating the second TA to the terminal device, including:
  • the network device sends a third message to the terminal device, where the third message includes information indicating the first TA and information indicating the second TA.
  • the third message also includes the corresponding relationship between the first TA and the first TRP, and the corresponding relationship between the second TA and the second TRP; wherein, the first TA
  • the corresponding relationship with the first TRP includes information indicating the first TA and the identification information of the first TRP.
  • the corresponding relationship between the second TA and the second TRP includes information indicating the second TRP. TA information and the identification information of the second TRP.
  • the network device sends information indicating the first TA and information indicating the second TA to the terminal device, including:
  • the network device sends a fourth message to the terminal device, where the fourth message includes information indicating the first TA;
  • the network device sends a fifth message to the terminal device, where the fifth message includes information indicating the second TA.
  • the fourth message also includes a corresponding relationship between the first TA and the first TRP, wherein the corresponding relationship between the first TA and the first TRP includes a message indicating that the first The information of the TA and the identification information of the first TRP; the fifth message also includes the corresponding relationship between the second TA and the second TRP, wherein the corresponding relationship between the second TA and the second TRP includes the information for Information indicating the second TA and identification information of the second TRP.
  • the first resource or the third resource is any one of the following:
  • Beams, random access resources, or sounding reference signal SRS resources are Beams, random access resources, or sounding reference signal SRS resources.
  • the present application provides a communication method, which method is suitable for terminal equipment or chips in the terminal equipment.
  • the following description takes the terminal equipment as the execution subject of the method as an example.
  • the terminal equipment has obtained and received the first transmission.
  • the first timing of point TRP communication is advanced TA.
  • the method includes:
  • the terminal device receives a configuration message for multi-transmission reception point mTRP transmission from the network device.
  • the configuration message for mTRP transmission includes information indicating a second TA.
  • the second TA is a TA corresponding to the second TRP.
  • the information of the second TA includes any one of the following: the value of the second TA, or the difference information between the value of the first TA and the value of the second TA;
  • the terminal device communicates with the second TRP using the second TA.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device has acquired the first TA communicating with the first TRP (that is, the terminal device has performed a single TRP transmission), if the network device determines that the terminal device is suitable for mTRP transmission, the network device may instruct the terminal device Perform mTRP transmission and directly indicate the second TA information to the terminal device. Therefore, after the terminal device obtains the second TA, in subsequent communications, the terminal device can send signals to different TRPs with accurate uplink sending time.
  • the configuration message transmitted by mTRP includes information indicating the second TA, including:
  • the configuration message transmitted by the mTRP includes the identification information of the second TRP and the information indicating the second TA.
  • the present application provides a communication method, which method is suitable for network equipment or chips in network equipment.
  • the following description takes the network equipment as the execution subject of the method as an example.
  • the method includes:
  • the network device sends the first timing advance TA corresponding to the first transmission reception point TRP to the terminal device, and the first TA is used for the terminal device to communicate with the first TRP;
  • the network device sends a configuration message for multi-transmission reception point mTRP transmission to the terminal device.
  • the configuration message for mTRP transmission includes information indicating a second TA.
  • the second TA is a TA corresponding to the second TRP.
  • the indication indicates The information of the second TA includes any one of the following: the value of the second TA, or the difference information between the value of the first TA and the value of the second TA, and the second TA is used for
  • the terminal device communicates with the second TRP.
  • the configuration message transmitted by mTRP includes information indicating the second TA, including:
  • the configuration message transmitted by the mTRP includes the identification information of the second TRP and the information indicating the second TA.
  • this application provides a communication device, which is a terminal device.
  • the terminal device has obtained the first timing advance TA for communication with the first transmission reception point TRP.
  • the device includes:
  • a transceiver unit used to obtain the configuration information of the first resource from the network device and the information instructing to obtain the TA;
  • a processing unit configured to use the first resource to send the information of the second TA for determining the second TRP to the network device through the transceiver unit according to the information indicating the acquisition of the TA;
  • the transceiver unit is configured to receive information indicating the second TA from the network device, and the second TA is used for the terminal device to communicate with the second TRP.
  • the transceiver unit when obtaining the configuration information of the first resource from the network device and the information indicating obtaining the TA, the transceiver unit is used to:
  • the configuration message for mTRP transmission includes the configuration information of the first resource and the information indicating to obtain a TA.
  • the transceiver unit when obtaining the configuration information of the first resource from the network device and the information indicating obtaining the TA, the transceiver unit is used to:
  • the configuration message for mTRP transmission includes the corresponding relationship between the first resource and the second TRP and the information indicating the acquisition of TA,
  • the corresponding relationship between the first resource and the second TRP includes the configuration information of the first resource and the identification information of the second TRP;
  • the processing unit is also used to:
  • the second TA corresponds to the second TRP.
  • the transceiver unit when obtaining the configuration information of the first resource from the network device and the information indicating obtaining the TA, the transceiver unit is used to:
  • a second message is received from the network device, where the second message includes information indicating obtaining the TA.
  • the first message is a configuration message for mTRP transmission
  • the second message is a physical downlink control channel command PDCCH order.
  • the first message further includes a correspondence between the first resource and the second TRP, and the correspondence between the first resource and the second TRP includes the first resource.
  • the processing unit is also used to:
  • the second TA corresponds to the second TRP.
  • the second message further includes a correspondence between the first resource and the second TRP, and the correspondence between the first resource and the second TRP includes the first resource.
  • the processing unit is also used to:
  • the second TA corresponds to the second TRP.
  • the transceiver unit when receiving information indicating the second TA from the network device, is configured to:
  • the processing unit is also used to:
  • the second TA corresponds to the second TRP.
  • the first resource is any one of the following:
  • Beams, random access resources, or sounding reference signal SRS resources are Beams, random access resources, or sounding reference signal SRS resources.
  • the transceiver unit is also used to:
  • the adjustment command includes identification information of the second TRP and TA update information corresponding to the second TRP, where the TA update information is used to update the second TA.
  • the configuration information transmitted by the mTRP also includes at least one of the following configuration information of the second resource corresponding to the second TRP:
  • Configuration information of the physical downlink control channel PDCCH resources Configuration information of the physical downlink control channel PDCCH resources, configuration information of the physical uplink control channel PUCCH resources, configuration information of the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH resources used for semi-static channel state information reporting, configuration information of downlink allocated resources, and uplink authorized resources Configuration information, configuration information of beams and/or beam sets, configuration information of resources corresponding to uplink reference signals.
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to use the second resource to receive an adjustment command from the network device, where the adjustment command includes TA update information corresponding to the second TRP, so The TA update information is used to update the second TA;
  • the processing unit is further configured to determine, based on the correspondence between the second resource and the second TRP, that the adjustment command corresponds to the second TRP, and the correspondence between the second resource and the second TRP.
  • the relationship includes configuration information of the second resource and identification information of the second TRP.
  • the first TRP corresponds to a first timer
  • the second TRP corresponds to a second timer
  • the processing unit performs at least one of the following operations:
  • indication information is sent to the network device through the transceiver unit, and the indication information is used to indicate the failure of the second TA.
  • the processing unit when sending indication information to the network device according to the first TA, is configured to:
  • the indication information is sent to the network device according to the first TA through the transceiver unit.
  • the first TRP and the second TRP correspond to the same cell, or the first TRP and the second TRP correspond to different cells.
  • the first TRP and the second TRP correspond to different cells, the first TRP corresponds to the source cell, and the second TRP corresponds to the target cell;
  • the transceiver unit After receiving the information indicating the second TA from the network device, the transceiver unit is also used to:
  • Handover is performed from the source cell to the target cell according to the handover command, which indicates using the second TA in the target cell.
  • the information indicating the second TA includes any of the following:
  • the value of the second TA or the difference information between the value of the first TA and the value of the second TA.
  • the information indicating the second TA is carried in a random access response message, or the information indicating the second TA is The information of the second TA is carried in the media access control unit MAC CE.
  • the information used to determine the second TA of the second TRP includes any of the following:
  • Preamble or SRS.
  • the processing unit after receiving the information indicating the second TA from the network device, the processing unit is further configured to:
  • this application provides a communication device, which is a network device, and the device includes:
  • a transceiver unit configured to send a first timing advance TA corresponding to the first transmission reception point TRP to the terminal device, where the first TA is used for the terminal device to communicate with the first TRP;
  • the transceiver unit is configured to send the configuration information of the first resource and information indicating the acquisition of TA to the terminal device;
  • the transceiver unit is configured to receive the second TA information for determining the second TRP sent by the terminal device using the first resource in response to the information for instructing to obtain the TA;
  • the transceiver unit is configured to send information indicating the second TA to the terminal device, and the second TA is used for the terminal device to communicate with the second TRP.
  • the transceiver unit after sending the configuration information of the first resource and the information indicating the acquisition of TA to the terminal device, the transceiver unit is configured to:
  • a configuration message for multi-transmission reception point mTRP transmission is sent to the terminal device, where the configuration message for mTRP transmission includes configuration information of the first resource and information indicating to obtain the TA.
  • the transceiver unit when sending the configuration information of the first resource and the information indicating the acquisition of TA to the terminal device, is configured to:
  • the configuration message for mTRP transmission includes the corresponding relationship between the first resource and the second TRP and the information indicating the acquisition of TA, so
  • the corresponding relationship between the first resource and the second TRP includes configuration information of the first resource and identification information of the second TRP.
  • the transceiver unit after sending the configuration information of the first resource and the information indicating the acquisition of TA to the terminal device, the transceiver unit is configured to:
  • the first message is a configuration message for mTRP transmission
  • the second message is a physical downlink control channel command PDCCH order.
  • the first message further includes a correspondence between the first resource and the second TRP, and the correspondence between the first resource and the second TRP includes the first resource. configuration information and identification information of the second TRP.
  • the second message further includes a correspondence between the first resource and the second TRP, and the correspondence between the first resource and the second TRP includes the first resource.
  • the indication information and the identification information of the second TRP are included in the second message.
  • the transceiver unit when sending information indicating the second TA to the terminal device, the transceiver unit is used to:
  • the first resource is any one of the following:
  • Beams, random access resources, or sounding reference signal SRS resources are Beams, random access resources, or sounding reference signal SRS resources.
  • the transceiver unit is also used to:
  • the adjustment command includes identification information of the second TRP and TA update information corresponding to the second TRP, where the TA update information is used to update the second TA.
  • the configuration information transmitted by the mTRP also includes at least one of the following configuration information of the second resource corresponding to the second TRP:
  • the transceiver unit is also used to:
  • the second resource uses the second resource to send an adjustment command to the terminal device, where the adjustment command includes the TA update corresponding to the second TRP. information, and the TA update information is used to update the second TA.
  • the transceiver unit is also used to:
  • the first TRP and the second TRP correspond to the same cell, or the first TRP and the second TRP correspond to different cells.
  • the information indicating the second TA includes any of the following:
  • the value of the second TA or the difference information between the value of the first TA and the value of the second TA.
  • the information indicating the second TA is carried in a random access response message, or the information indicating the second TA is carried in a media access control unit MAC CE.
  • the information used to determine the second TA of the second TRP includes any of the following:
  • Preamble or SRS.
  • this application provides a communication device, which is a terminal device, and the device includes:
  • a transceiver unit configured to receive configuration information of the third resource corresponding to the first TRP and configuration information of the first resource corresponding to the second TRP from the network device;
  • the transceiver unit is configured to use the third resource to send information for determining the first TA of the first TRP to the first TRP, and use the first resource to send information to the second TRP.
  • the transceiver unit is configured to receive information indicating the first TA and information indicating the second TA from the network device.
  • the transceiver unit when receiving the configuration information of the third resource corresponding to the first TRP and the configuration information of the first resource corresponding to the second TRP from the network device, the transceiver unit is configured to:
  • a switching command is received from the network device, where the switching command includes configuration information of the third resource corresponding to the first TRP and configuration information of the first resource corresponding to the second TRP.
  • the switching command further includes a corresponding relationship between the third resource and the first TRP, and a corresponding relationship between the first resource and the second TRP; wherein, the third resource
  • the corresponding relationship between the three resources and the first TRP includes the configuration information of the third resource and the identification information of the first TRP.
  • the corresponding relationship between the first resource and the second TRP includes the first resource.
  • the device further includes a processing unit configured to:
  • the second TA corresponds to the second TRP.
  • the transceiving unit when receiving information indicating the first TA and information indicating the second TA from the network device, the transceiving unit is configured to:
  • a third message is received from the network device, the third message including information indicating the first TA and information indicating the second TA.
  • the third message also includes the corresponding relationship between the first TA and the first TRP, and the corresponding relationship between the second TA and the second TRP; wherein, the first TA
  • the corresponding relationship with the first TRP includes information indicating the first TA and the identification information of the first TRP.
  • the corresponding relationship between the second TA and the second TRP includes information indicating the second TRP. TA information and the identification information of the second TRP;
  • the device further includes a processing unit configured to:
  • the first TA corresponds to the first TRP
  • the second TA corresponds to the second TRP.
  • the processing unit when receiving information indicating the first TA and information indicating the second TA from the network device, the processing unit is configured to:
  • the fourth message including information indicating the first TA
  • a fifth message is received from the network device, the fifth message including information indicating the second TA.
  • the fourth message also includes a corresponding relationship between the first TA and the first TRP, wherein the corresponding relationship between the first TA and the first TRP includes a message indicating that the first The information of the TA and the identification information of the first TRP;
  • the fifth message also includes the corresponding relationship between the second TA and the second TRP, wherein the corresponding relationship between the second TA and the second TRP includes the information for Information indicating the second TA and identification information of the second TRP;
  • the device further includes a processing unit configured to:
  • the first TA corresponds to the first TRP
  • the second TA corresponds to the second TRP.
  • the first resource or the third resource is any one of the following:
  • Beams, random access resources, or sounding reference signal SRS resources are Beams, random access resources, or sounding reference signal SRS resources.
  • this application provides a communication device, which is a network device, and the device includes:
  • a transceiver unit configured to send the configuration information of the third resource corresponding to the first TRP and the configuration information of the first resource corresponding to the second TRP to the terminal device;
  • the transceiver unit is configured to receive information from the terminal device for determining the first TA of the first TRP through the first TRP, and receive user information from the terminal device through the second TRP. Information about the second TA used to determine the second TRP;
  • the transceiver unit is configured to send information indicating the first TA and information indicating the second TA to the terminal device.
  • the transceiver unit before sending the configuration information of the third resource corresponding to the first TRP and the configuration information of the first resource corresponding to the second TRP to the terminal device, the transceiver unit is configured to:
  • the switching command includes configuration information of the third resource corresponding to the first TRP and configuration information of the first resource corresponding to the second TRP.
  • the switching command further includes a corresponding relationship between the third resource and the first TRP, and a corresponding relationship between the first resource and the second TRP; wherein, the third resource
  • the corresponding relationship between the three resources and the first TRP includes the configuration information of the third resource and the identification information of the first TRP.
  • the corresponding relationship between the first resource and the second TRP includes the first resource. configuration information and identification information of the second TRP.
  • the transceiving unit when sending information indicating the first TA and information indicating the second TA to the terminal device, the transceiving unit is configured to:
  • a third message is sent to the terminal device, where the third message includes information indicating the first TA and information indicating the second TA.
  • the third message also includes the corresponding relationship between the first TA and the first TRP, and the corresponding relationship between the second TA and the second TRP; wherein, the first TA
  • the corresponding relationship with the first TRP includes information indicating the first TA and the identification information of the first TRP.
  • the corresponding relationship between the second TA and the second TRP includes information indicating the second TRP. TA information and the identification information of the second TRP.
  • the transceiving unit when sending information indicating the first TA and information indicating the second TA to the terminal device, the transceiving unit is configured to:
  • a fifth message is sent to the terminal device, the fifth message including information indicating the second TA.
  • the fourth message also includes a corresponding relationship between the first TA and the first TRP, wherein the corresponding relationship between the first TA and the first TRP includes a message indicating that the first The information of the TA and the identification information of the first TRP; the fifth message also includes the corresponding relationship between the second TA and the second TRP, wherein the corresponding relationship between the second TA and the second TRP includes the information for Information indicating the second TA and identification information of the second TRP.
  • the first resource or the third resource is any one of the following:
  • Beams, random access resources, or sounding reference signal SRS resources are Beams, random access resources, or sounding reference signal SRS resources.
  • the present application provides a communication device.
  • the device is a terminal device.
  • the terminal has obtained the first timing advance TA for communication with the first transmission reception point TRP.
  • the device includes:
  • a transceiver unit configured to receive a configuration message for mTRP transmission from a network device.
  • the configuration message for mTRP transmission includes information indicating a second TA.
  • the second TA is a TA corresponding to the second TRP.
  • the information indicating the second TA includes any one of the following: the value of the second TA, or the difference information between the value of the first TA and the value of the second TA;
  • a processing unit configured to communicate with the second TRP using the second TA.
  • the configuration message transmitted by mTRP includes information indicating the second TA, including:
  • the configuration message transmitted by the mTRP includes the identification information of the second TRP and the information indicating the second TA.
  • this application provides a communication device, which is a network device, and the device includes:
  • a transceiver unit configured to send a first timing advance TA corresponding to the first transmission reception point TRP to the terminal device, where the first TA is used for the terminal device to communicate with the first TRP;
  • the transceiver unit is configured to send a configuration message for multi-transmission reception point mTRP transmission to the terminal device.
  • the configuration message for mTRP transmission includes information indicating a second TA, and the second TA is a TA corresponding to the second TRP, so
  • the information indicating the second TA includes any one of the following: the value of the second TA, or the difference information between the value of the first TA and the value of the second TA, the second For TA
  • the terminal device communicates with the second TRP.
  • the configuration message transmitted by mTRP includes information indicating the second TA, including:
  • the configuration message transmitted by the mTRP includes the identification information of the second TRP and the information indicating the second TA.
  • the present application provides a communication device, which may be a terminal device, a device in the terminal device, or a device that can be used in conjunction with the terminal device.
  • the communication device may also be a chip system.
  • the communication device may perform the method described in the first aspect, the third aspect, or the fifth aspect.
  • the functions of the communication device can be implemented by hardware, or can be implemented by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more units or modules corresponding to the above functions.
  • the unit or module may be software and/or hardware.
  • the operations and beneficial effects performed by the communication device can be referred to the methods and beneficial effects described in the above-mentioned first aspect, third aspect, or fifth aspect, and repeated descriptions will not be repeated.
  • the present application provides a communication device, which may be a network device, a device in a network device, or a device that can be used in conjunction with a network device.
  • the communication device may also be a chip system.
  • the communication device can perform the method described in the second aspect, the fourth aspect, or the sixth aspect.
  • the functions of the communication device can be implemented by hardware, or can be implemented by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more units or modules corresponding to the above functions.
  • the unit or module may be software and/or hardware.
  • the present application provides a communication device, which may be a terminal device.
  • the communication device includes a processor and a transceiver.
  • the processor and the transceiver are configured to execute at least one computer stored in a memory. Programs or instructions, so that the device implements the method of any one of the first aspect, the third aspect, or the fifth aspect.
  • the present application provides a communication device, which may be a terminal device.
  • the communication device includes a processor, a transceiver, and a memory. Wherein, the processor, the transceiver and the memory are coupled; the processor and the transceiver are used to implement the method of any one of the first aspect or the third aspect or the fifth aspect and/or the second aspect or the fourth aspect or the sixth aspect. .
  • the present application provides a communication device, which may be a network device.
  • the communication device includes a processor and a transceiver.
  • the processor and the transceiver are configured to execute at least one computer stored in a memory. Programs or instructions, so that the device implements the method of any one of the second aspect, the fourth aspect, or the sixth aspect.
  • the present application provides a communication device, which may be a network device.
  • the communication device includes a processor, a transceiver, and a memory. Wherein, the processor, the transceiver and the memory are coupled; the processor and the transceiver are used to implement the method of any one of the second aspect, the fourth aspect or the sixth aspect and/or the second aspect, the fourth aspect or the sixth aspect. .
  • the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium.
  • Computer programs or instructions are stored in the storage medium.
  • the computer program or instructions are executed by the computer, the first aspect, the third aspect, or the fifth aspect are implemented. any of the methods.
  • the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium.
  • Computer programs or instructions are stored in the storage medium.
  • the second aspect, the fourth aspect, or the sixth aspect are implemented. any of the methods.
  • the present application provides a computer program product including instructions.
  • the computer program product includes computer program code.
  • the computer program code is run on a computer, the first aspect or the third aspect or the third aspect is implemented. method in any of the five aspects.
  • the present application provides a computer program product including instructions.
  • the computer program product includes computer program code.
  • the computer program code is run on a computer, the second aspect or the fourth aspect or the third aspect is implemented. method in any of the six aspects.
  • a twenty-third aspect provides a communication system, which includes the terminal equipment described in the seventh aspect, the ninth aspect, or the eleventh aspect, and the eighth aspect, the tenth aspect, or the twelfth aspect. the network equipment described above.
  • Figure 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 2 is a schematic diagram of mTRP transmission provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 3 is a schematic flow chart of obtaining the initial TA based on the non-contention random access process
  • Figure 4 is a schematic diagram of the Intra-cell mTRP transmission scenario provided by the embodiment of this application.
  • Figure 5 is a schematic diagram of the Inter-cell mTRP transmission scenario provided by the embodiment of this application.
  • Figure 6 is a schematic flow chart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is another schematic flowchart of the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 8 is another schematic flow chart of the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is another schematic flowchart of the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 10 is another schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 11 is another schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 13 is a schematic structural diagram of another communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 14 is a schematic structural diagram of another communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 15 is a schematic structural diagram of another communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • LTE long term evolution
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • TDD time division duplex
  • NR new radio
  • 5th generation, 5G fifth generation
  • 6th generation, 6G sixth generation
  • WALN Wireless Local Area Network
  • Figure 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • access network equipment and terminal equipment 1 to 6 form a communication system.
  • terminal equipment 1 to terminal equipment 6 can send uplink information to the access network equipment, and the access network equipment can also send downlink information to terminal equipment 1 to terminal equipment 6.
  • the terminal devices 4 to 6 may also form a communication system.
  • the access network device can send downlink information to terminal device 1, terminal device 2, terminal device 5, etc.; terminal device 5 can also send downlink information to terminal device 4, terminal device 6.
  • the terminal equipment 4 and the terminal equipment 6 can also send uplink information to the access network equipment through the terminal equipment 5.
  • the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application may be a device with wireless transceiver function, which may specifically refer to user equipment (UE), access terminal, subscriber unit (subscriber unit), user station, or mobile station. (mobile station), customer-premises equipment (CPE), remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, wireless communication equipment, user agent or user device.
  • UE user equipment
  • access terminal subscriber unit (subscriber unit)
  • subscriber unit subscriber unit
  • user station or mobile station.
  • CPE customer-premises equipment
  • remote station remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, wireless communication equipment, user agent or user device.
  • the terminal device may also be a satellite phone, a cellular phone, a smartphone, a wireless data card, a wireless modem, a machine type communications device, a cordless phone, a session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (wireless local) loop (WLL) station, personal digital assistant (PDA), handheld device with wireless communication capabilities, computing device or other processing device connected to a wireless modem, vehicle-mounted equipment, communication equipment carried on high-altitude aircraft, wearable Equipment, drones, robots, smart point of sale (POS) machines, terminals in device-to-device communication (D2D), terminals in vehicle to everything (V2X) , virtual reality (VR) terminal equipment, augmented reality (AR) terminal equipment, wireless terminals in industrial control (industrial control), wireless terminals in self-driving (self driving), remote medicine (remote) Wireless terminals in medical, wireless terminals in smart grid, wireless terminals in transportation safety, wireless terminals in smart city, wireless terminals in smart home Or terminal equipment in future communication networks, etc
  • the device used to implement the function of the terminal device may be a terminal device; it may also be a device that can support the terminal device to implement the function, such as a chip system.
  • the device can be installed in a terminal device or used in conjunction with the terminal device.
  • the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the access network device in the embodiment of the present application may be a device with wireless transceiver functions for communicating with a terminal device, or may be a device that connects a terminal device to a wireless network.
  • the access network device may be a node in the wireless access network, may also be called a base station, or may be called a radio access network (radio access network, RAN) node (or device).
  • the access network equipment may be an evolved base station (eNB or eNodeB) in LTE; or a next generation node B (gNB) in a 5G network or a future evolved public land mobile network (public land mobile network).
  • the access network equipment in the embodiment of the present application may include various forms of base stations, such as: macro base stations, micro base stations (also (called small stations), relay stations, access points, equipment that implements base station functions in the communication system evolved after 5G, access point (AP), transmission point (transmitting and receiving point, TRP) in the WiFi system, Transmitting point (TP), mobile switching center, and device-to-device (D2D), vehicle outreach (vehicle-to-everything, V2X), machine-to-machine (M2M) ) equipment that undertakes base station functions in communications, etc., may also include centralized units (CU) and distributed units (DU) in the cloud radio access network (C-RAN) system, Access network equipment in non-terrestrial network (NTN) communication systems can be deployed on high-altitude platforms or satellites.
  • CU centralized units
  • DU distributed units
  • C-RAN cloud radio access network
  • NTN non-terrestrial network
  • Access network equipment can communicate and interact with core network equipment to provide communication services to terminal equipment.
  • the core network equipment is, for example, equipment in the 5G network core network (core network, CN).
  • core network As a bearer network, the core network provides an interface to the data network, provides terminals with communication connections, authentication, management, policy control, and carries data services.
  • the device used to implement the function of the access network device may be the access network device; it may also be a device that can support the access network device to implement the function, such as a chip system.
  • the device can be installed in the access network equipment or used in conjunction with the access network equipment.
  • access network equipment in the following embodiments of the present application can also be described as network equipment, which is not limited here.
  • mTRP transmission refers to multiple TRPs providing communication services to UE.
  • Multiple TRPs are multiple antennas separated in physical locations or multiple antenna arrays on the same antenna, forming multiple TRPs (i.e. mTRP) to form different spatial channels.
  • mTRP multiple TRPs
  • the maximum beamforming gain or spatial diversity reliability gain is formed to enhance coverage or reliability.
  • Figure 2 is a schematic diagram of mTRP transmission provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 2, take TRP#1 and TRP#2 as an example, where TRP#1 and TRP#2 can communicate with the UE.
  • Timing advance (TA)
  • TA refers to the timing advance for the UE to send an uplink signal to the network device.
  • the UE determines the time to send the uplink signal based on the TA value.
  • UE1 and UE2 send uplink signals at the same time, because UE1 and UE2 are at different distances from the network device, the uplink signals sent by UE1 and UE2 will not arrive.
  • There is a difference in the time of the network equipment which may cause signal interference between users, making the network equipment unable to correctly decode the signals of the two users. Therefore, UE1 and UE2 need to determine the time to send the uplink signal according to their respective TAs, so that the time when the signal reaches the network device is close to reducing signal interference.
  • TA management includes: (1) initial TA acquisition; (2) TA update and adjustment; (3) behavioral processing after TA failure.
  • the UE obtains the initial TA through the random access process.
  • the non-contention random access process shown in Figure 3 is used as an example to illustrate the process of the UE obtaining the initial TA. As shown in Figure 3:
  • the network device sends message 0 (Msg0) to the terminal device.
  • message 0 contains the configuration of random access resources, and the configuration of the random access resources may include a preamble, etc.
  • the terminal device sends message 1 (Msg1) to the network device.
  • This message 1 includes the preamble assigned by the network device, that is, the terminal device uses the preamble assigned by the network device to initiate random access.
  • the network device sends message 2 (Msg2) to the terminal device.
  • This message 2 may also be called a random access response (random access response, RAR) message.
  • Message 2 includes the value of TA calculated by the network device.
  • the network device involved in the embodiment of this application is an access network device, and may specifically be a gNB, for example.
  • the UE obtains the initial TA for communicating with the gNB, and uses the TA to determine the sending time when transmitting subsequent uplink signals.
  • the gNB can send a TA adjustment command.
  • the TA adjustment command can be for media access.
  • Control control element media access control control element, MAC CE.
  • the UE and/or gNB can maintain a timer to determine whether the previously received TA is currently valid. Still valid. For example, after receiving the initial TA , the above timer can be started/restarted; the UE can restart the above timer after receiving the TA adjustment command. When the above timer times out, the TA is considered to have expired.
  • the UE When the UE determines that the TA has expired, it can release some configured uplink transmission-related resources, such as sounding reference signal (SRS), physical uplink control channel (PUCCH), configured grant, CG) etc. Further, when the UE has uplink data to be transmitted and it is determined that the TA has expired, the UE triggers a random access process. When gNB has downlink data to be transmitted and determines that the TA has expired, gNB sends a message to the UE to trigger the UE to perform a random access process. The UE reacquires TA through the subsequent random access process.
  • SRS sounding reference signal
  • PUCCH physical uplink control channel
  • CG configured grant
  • the above TA management can be applied to the process of single TRP transmission, or the above TA management can also be applied to the process of mTRP transmission scenario where multiple TRPs correspond to a common TA, that is, the UE transmits data to a common TA according to a common TA.
  • mTRP sends uplink signals.
  • the method of determining the time to send uplink signals based on the public TA makes the accuracy of uplink signal sending low.
  • this application provides a communication method and communication device, which can improve the accuracy of uplink signal transmission in mTRP transmission scenarios.
  • this application mainly takes the UE communicating with two TRPs as an example to describe the solution. It should be understood that the solution in this application is also applicable to the mTRP transmission scenario in which the UE communicates with more than two TRPs.
  • mTRP transmission scenarios mainly include Intra-cell mTRP scenarios and Inter-cell mTRP scenarios:
  • Intra-cell mTRP scenario refers to the UE transmitting data with multiple TRPs in a serving cell, that is, multiple TRPs provide services for the same cell, or it can also be understood as multiple TRPs associated with the same physical cell identity (physical cell identity (PCI).
  • PCI physical cell identity
  • Figure 4 is a schematic diagram of an Intra-cell mTRP transmission scenario provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 4, TRP#1 and TRP#2 belong to the same network device, or it can be understood that TRP#1 and TRP#2 correspond to the same cell. The TRP#1 and TRP#2 can be used to provide mTRP transmission for the UE, that is, Intra-cell mTRP transmission.
  • Inter-cell mTRP scenario refers to that the UE is in a serving cell. In addition to communicating with the TRP of the serving cell, it can also communicate with the TRP of another cell. In the Inter-cell mTRP scenario, it can be understood that multiple TRPs communicating with the UE are associated with different PCIs. For example, please refer to Figure 5.
  • Figure 5 is a schematic diagram of an Inter-cell mTRP transmission scenario provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 5, TRP#1 belongs to network device 1, and TRP#2 belongs to network device 2, or it can be understood that TRP#1 corresponds to cell 1, and TRP#2 corresponds to cell 2. TRP#1 of cell 1 and TRP#2 of cell 2 can cooperate to perform mTRP transmission, that is, Inter-cell mTRP transmission.
  • the network device that provides services for cell 1 is designated as network device 1
  • the network device that provides services for cell 2 is designated as network device 2.
  • the following network equipment 1 and network equipment 2 are the same network equipment.
  • the following interaction between network device 1 and network device 2 can be understood as an internal implementation of a network device, and is an optional step in the embodiment of this application.
  • Case a Before performing mTRP transmission, the UE will first establish a communication connection with a single TRP. For example, the UE first communicates with TRP#1 to obtain the TA of TRP#1, and then starts mTRP under the instruction of the network device. Transmit and establish communication with TRP#2 to obtain the TA of TRP#2.
  • Case b The UE can directly establish mTRP transmission in a certain cell, that is, the UE needs to obtain the TA of TRP#1 and TRP#2 at the same time.
  • the TA management in case a and case b is mainly different in the initial TA acquisition phase. Subsequent TA update and maintenance and UE/network device behavior after TA failure are consistent.
  • Each of the following embodiments will provide a complete description of the TA management process in case a and case b in the Intra-cell mTRP scenario and the Inter-cell mTRP scenario respectively.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the execution subject of steps 601 to 605 is a terminal device or a network device, or a chip in a terminal device or a network device.
  • the following description takes terminal equipment and network equipment as the execution subjects of the method as examples.
  • the terminal device involved in Figure 6 has obtained the first TA that communicates with the first TRP, that is, the embodiment shown in Figure 6 mainly describes TA management in the Intra-cell mTRP scenario.
  • the communication method includes the following steps S601 to S605, where steps S601 to S603 are mainly for the initial TA acquisition description in case a of the Intra-cell mTRP scenario, and step S604 is mainly for the Intra-cell mTRP Description of TA update adjustment in scenario a.
  • Step S605 is mainly a description of behavioral processing after TA failure in scenario a of Intra-cell mTRP. in:
  • the terminal device obtains the configuration information of the first resource from the network device and the information instructing to obtain the TA.
  • the network device may send configuration information of one or more resources to the terminal device, where the one or more resources include the first resource. For example, when the network device only sends the configuration information of one resource, the one resource is the first resource. When the network device sends the configuration information of multiple (that is, two or more) resources, the multiple resources Included in the first resource.
  • the configuration information of one or more resources and the information used to instruct the acquisition of TA can be carried in one message at the same time.
  • the configuration information of the one or more resources and the information used to instruct the acquisition of TA are carried in the mTRP transmission.
  • the network device sends a configuration message for mTRP transmission to the terminal device.
  • the mTRP transmission configuration message includes configuration information of one or more resources and information for instructing to obtain TA.
  • the configuration information of one or more resources and the information used to indicate obtaining TA can also be carried in one message respectively.
  • the configuration information of one or more resources is carried in In the first message, the information used to indicate obtaining the TA is carried in the second message. That is to say, the network device sends the first message and the second message to the terminal device, where the first message includes one or more resources.
  • Configuration information, the second message includes information for instructing to obtain TA (or the second message can be used to instruct to obtain TA, in the following, the second message includes information for instructing to obtain TA as an example).
  • the order in which the network device sends the first message and the second message to the terminal device is not limited here.
  • the above-mentioned first message is a configuration message for mTRP transmission.
  • the above-mentioned second message is a physical downlink control channel order (PDCCH order).
  • the second message can also be MAC CE, etc., which is not limited here.
  • the terminal device when the configuration information of one or more resources is carried in the first message, and the information used to instruct the acquisition of TA is carried in the second message, the terminal device does not perform S602 immediately after receiving the first message, but It is to wait until the second message is received before executing S602.
  • the resource configuration information is a non-competition random access resource
  • the terminal device when the terminal device receives the non-competition random access resource corresponding to the second TRP, the terminal device does not immediately initiate the random access process. Instead, it waits for the second message to be received before initiating the random access process.
  • the "mTRP transmission configuration message” involved in the embodiment of this application can be understood as a message used to configure mTRP transmission, wherein the mTRP transmission configuration message can be RRC (Radio Resource Control, Radio Resource Control) Messages, or messages at other protocol layers, are not limited in this application.
  • the "information used to instruct the acquisition of TA” involved in the embodiment of this application can be understood as used to instruct the terminal device to send the information of the second TA used to determine the second TRP to the network device.
  • any information that requires sending an uplink message (such as a preamble, SRS) to the network device through the first resource can be understood as information indicating the acquisition of the TA, that is, the information itself is not limited to indicating the acquisition of the TA.
  • information used to instruct the acquisition of TA is downlink control information (DCI) in a special format.
  • the network device sends the configuration information of one or more resources to the terminal device. Specifically, it can be understood that: the network device sends the configuration information between each of the one or more resources and the TRP to the terminal device. Correspondence, in which the correspondence between any resource and a certain TRP includes the configuration information of the resource and the identification information of the TRP.
  • the identification information of the TRP can be TRPID, etc., which is not limited here. That is to say, in addition to being configured with the configuration information of one or more resources, the terminal device also knows which TRP each of the one or more configured resources should correspond to in a one-to-one manner.
  • the correspondence between the first resource and the second TRP sent by the network device to the terminal device includes the first resource Configuration information and identification information of the second TRP. It can be understood that since the resource configuration information received by the terminal device and the corresponding TRP identification information are carried in the same message (such as the configuration message transmitted by mTRP, or the first message), the terminal device can naturally learn the configured resources and There is a corresponding relationship between the identification information of TRP.
  • the terminal device may determine that the configuration message or the first message transmitted by mTRP includes There is a corresponding relationship between the resources and the identification information of the TRP; when the configuration message or the first message transmitted by the mTRP includes the configuration information of multiple resources and the identification information of the TRP corresponding to each of the multiple resources, the terminal device can According to the configuration information of the resource included in the configuration message transmitted by the mTRP or the first message and the identification information of the TRP corresponding to the resource, determine the configuration information of the multiple resources and the identification information of the TRP corresponding to each of the multiple resources. correspondence between.
  • the network device sends the configuration information of one or more resources to the terminal device, which can also be understood as: the network device sends the configuration information of one or more resources and the identification information of the TRP corresponding to each resource to the terminal device. .
  • the configuration information of one or more resources sent by the network device to the terminal device may not include the identification information of TRP. That is to say, the configuration message transmitted by the terminal device through mTRP or The first message only knows that the configuration information of one or more resources is configured, but does not know which TRP or TRPs the configuration information of the one or more resources is configured for. In this case, if the terminal device wants to know The configuration information of each resource is for which TRP. Then you can also configure the configuration information based on the TRP and The relationship between parameter names is determined.
  • the parameter name may be the name of the configuration message or the first message transmitted by mTRP, or the parameter name may also be the parameter name configured to obtain one or more resources of the TA.
  • the terminal device can determine that Resource1 corresponds to TRP1 according to ResourceforTRP1. For example, if the configuration content corresponding to parameter name 2 (denoted as ResourceforTRP2) is Resource2, then the terminal device can determine according to ResourceforTRP1 ResourceforTRP2, it can be determined that Resource2 corresponds to TRP2. Therefore, the terminal device can determine that the configuration information of the first resource corresponds to the second TRP based on the association between the parameter name and the TRP, and further determines that the subsequently received TA corresponds to the second TRP.
  • the terminal device passes When the configuration message or the first message transmitted by mTRP only knows that the configuration information of one or more resources is configured, but does not know which TRP or TRPs the configuration information of the one or more resources is configured for, if the terminal device wants to Knowing which TRP the subsequently received TA corresponds to, can also be achieved through method (1) or method (2) described in the following step S602, which will not be described in detail here.
  • the network device when the network device only sends the configuration information of one resource (that is, the network device only configures one resource for the terminal device), the one resource is the first resource, so the terminal device can use the first resource to send information to the network
  • the device sends information for determining the second TA of the second TRP.
  • the network device when the network device sends the configuration information of multiple resources (that is, the network device configures multiple resources for the terminal device), then the network device also needs to send the indication information of the resources used to the terminal device (for example, in the subsequent Taking indication information of a resource as an example), the terminal device is informed to subsequently use the first resource to send information for determining the second TA of the second TRP to the network device.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device is configured with multiple resources, the terminal device may also determine on its own that the first resource among the multiple resources should be used to send information for determining the second TA of the second TRP to the network device.
  • the network device when the network device sends the configuration information of multiple resources, the following mainly uses the network device to inform the terminal device by sending the instruction information of the first resource to the terminal device, and it should subsequently use the first resource to send the configuration information to the network device.
  • the information of the second TA used to determine the second TRP is schematically explained as an example.
  • the indication information of the first resource can be carried in the configuration message transmitted by mTRP. That is to say, when the configuration information of the resource and the information used to indicate obtaining the TA are carried in one message at the same time, the network In addition to configuring multiple resources for the terminal device and instructing the acquisition of TA information through the configuration message transmitted by mTRP, the device also needs to specify/instruct the first resource to be used for the terminal device, and the first resource corresponds to the second TRP.
  • the indication information of the first resource may be an identifier of the first resource, and the identifier of the first resource is used to uniquely identify the first resource.
  • the indication information of the first resource may be carried in the second message, that is, when the configuration information of multiple resources and the information used to indicate obtaining TA are each carried in one message (where multiple resources When the configuration information of the TA is carried in the first message and the information used to instruct to obtain the TA is carried in the second message), the second message may also include indication information of the first resource (or in other words, the second message may be used to indicate the first resource).
  • resources that is, in addition to configuring multiple resources for the terminal device through the first message and carrying information for instructing to obtain TA through the second message, the network device also needs to specify/instruct the terminal device to use the first resource through the second message.
  • the indication information of the first resource may be PDCCH order, or MAC CE, etc., which is not limited here.
  • the corresponding relationship between each resource and the identification information of the TRP in the above embodiment of the present application can be configured in the first message, or can also be indicated in the second message. Based on the corresponding relationship, when the terminal device uses a certain resource to send information for determining the TA of a certain TRP, it can determine which TRP corresponds to the TA received later based on the corresponding relationship between the resource and the identification information of the TRP. .
  • the following embodiments of the present application mainly take the first resource and the first resource corresponding to the second TRP as an example for illustrative description. That is to say, the corresponding relationship between the identification information of the first resource and the second TRP can be
  • the subsequent terminal device uses the first resource to send information for determining the second TA of the second TRP, it can determine that the second TA received subsequently is based on the correspondence between the first resource and the identification information of the second TRP.
  • the TA corresponding to the second TRP is mainly take the first resource and the first resource corresponding to the second TRP as an example for illustrative description. That is to say, the corresponding relationship between the identification information of the first resource and the second TRP can be
  • the subsequent terminal device uses the first resource to send information for determining the second TA of the second TRP, it can determine that the second TA received subsequently is based on the correspondence between the first resource and the identification information of the second TRP.
  • the TA corresponding to the second TRP is
  • the above-mentioned first resource may be a beam (or described as a beam direction).
  • the terminal device may use the beam (or in the beam direction) to send to the network device the information for determining the third resource.
  • Information about the second TA of the second TRP For the network device, after the network device receives the information of the second TA from the terminal device used to determine the second TRP on the beam (or in the direction of the beam), the network device can calculate the second TA based on the received information. , further, the network device may use the same beam as the received information to feed back the information indicating the second TA to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device can determine the TA received on the beam according to the correspondence between the beam and the identification information of the second TRP. It is TA for the second TRP.
  • the beam or beam direction in the embodiment of the present application is associated with the physical broadcast channel block (synchronization signal and physical broadcast channel block, SSB) identifier.
  • SSB#2 is associated with the beam direction of the second TRP. Therefore, the terminal device According to SSB#2, the beam direction corresponding to the second TRP can be determined.
  • CSI-RS channel state information reference signal
  • the first resource may be a random access resource, or the first resource may be an SRS resource.
  • the random access resource or the SRS resource is a resource associated with the second TRP, or in other words, the configuration message or the first message transmitted by the mTRP indicates that the random access resource or the SRS resource is the second TRP.
  • Corresponding random access resources or SRS resources Therefore, after the terminal device uses the random access resources or SRS resources associated with the second TRP to send the information for determining the second TA of the second TRP to the network device, the terminal device can naturally determine that the subsequently received TA is the third TA. The TA corresponding to the second TRP.
  • this application takes the configuration information of the first resource as an example.
  • the configuration information of the first resource may be the configuration information of the random access resource, or the configuration information of the first resource may be the configuration information of the SRS resource.
  • the configuration information of random access resources may include beams (or beam directions), random access preambles, time domain resources, frequency domain resources, and mapping relationships between beams and time domain resources and frequency domain resources.
  • One or more configurations such as identification information of the second TRP and identification information of the cell corresponding to the second TRP.
  • the configuration information of SRS resources may include beams (or beam directions), time domain resources, frequency domain resources, mapping relationships between beams and time domain resources and frequency domain resources, identification information of the second TRP, and 2.
  • One or more configurations such as the identification information of the cell corresponding to the TRP.
  • the configuration message transmitted by mTRP may also include at least one of the following configuration information of the second resource corresponding to the second TRP: the physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) resource corresponding to the second TRP Configuration information, the configuration information of the physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) resource corresponding to the second TRP, the physical uplink shared channel (physical uplink shared channel) used for semi-static channel status information reporting corresponding to the second TRP, PUSCH) resource configuration information, the configuration information of the downlink allocated resources corresponding to the second TRP, the configuration information of the uplink authorized resources corresponding to the second TRP, the configuration information of the beam and/or beam set corresponding to the second TRP, and the uplink reference signal corresponding
  • the resource configuration information, the TA Group (that is, TAG) identification corresponding to the second TRP, and other information are not limited here.
  • the terminal equipment uses the same TA to send uplink signals to the cell/TRP with the same TA group identity.
  • the beams and/or beam sets corresponding to the second TRP in the second resources may include beams included in the first resources, and the resources corresponding to the uplink reference signals in the second resources may include resources corresponding to the SRS included in the first resources.
  • the second resources involved in this application are all understood as resources corresponding to the second TRP.
  • the second resource and the second TRP For how to determine the correspondence between the second resource and the second TRP, please refer to the above-mentioned determination of the first resource and the second TRP.
  • the description of the corresponding relationship that is, the identification information of the second TRP may be explicitly included in the configuration information of the second resource, or determined through the association between the TRP and the parameter name) will not be described in detail here.
  • the configuration of the PDCCH resources corresponding to the second TRP may be, for example, the configuration of a control resource set (CORESET), and the configuration of the beam and/or beam set corresponding to the second TRP may be, for example, some synchronization signals and Physical broadcast channel block (synchronization signal and physical broadcast channel block, SSB) identification, channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) identification, and/or transmission configuration indication state (TCI State) ) identification and other configurations.
  • the uplink reference signal configuration corresponding to the second TRP may be, for example, the configuration of one or more SRSs.
  • the terminal device uses the first resource to send the information of the second TA used to determine the second TRP to the network device according to the information used to instruct the acquisition of the TA.
  • the network device receives information from the terminal device on the first resource for determining the second TA of the second TRP.
  • the terminal device may use the first resource to send the information of the second TA for determining the second TRP to the network device based on the trigger for instructing to obtain the information of the TA.
  • the information of the second TA sent by the terminal device to the network device for determining the second TRP is a random access preamble or called a random access preamble. Preamble.
  • the information for determining the second TA of the second TRP sent by the terminal device to the network device is the SRS.
  • the terminal device knows one or more configured resources during the stage of configuring mTRP transmission, and knows which TRP each of the above one or more resources is configured for, (That is, the terminal device knows the correspondence between each resource and the identification information of the TRP), then the terminal device can determine which TRP the subsequently received TA is for according to the correspondence between the resource and the identification information of the TRP. For details, see the above The relevant description in step S601 will not be described again here.
  • the terminal device can use either of the following two methods to determine which TRP the subsequently received TA is:
  • the second information may also carry the corresponding relationship between the first resource and the second TRP.
  • the correspondence between the first resource and the second TRP includes indication information of the first resource and identification information of the second TRP. That is to say, the second message may include a field that is used to indicate a TRP-related identity identifier (for example, indicating the identification information of the second TRP).
  • the terminal device can determine based on the second message that this field is used to indicate The TA information is obtained, and the information sent to the network device to determine the TA is initiated for the second TRP, and the TA subsequently received is also the TA corresponding to the second TRP.
  • this field in the second message is used to indicate that this TA acquisition is not for the first TRP.
  • the network device may also send an identity identifier indicating the TRP-related identity (for example, identification information indicating the second TRP) to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device Receive information indicating the second TA and identification information of the second TRP from the network device. That is to say, in addition to feeding back the information of the second TA to the terminal device, the network device can also feed back to the terminal device the identification information of the second TRP associated with the information of the second TA. Therefore, the terminal device can use the information fed back by the network device to Based on the information indicating the second TA and the identification information of the second TRP, it is determined that the received second TA is a TA for the second TRP.
  • the terminal device receives information indicating the second TA from the network device.
  • the network device may calculate the second TA based on the received information of the second TA used to determine the second TRP, and feed back the information indicating the second TA to the terminal device. Accordingly, the terminal device receives information indicating the second TA from the network device.
  • the network device can carry information indicating the second TA in the random access response message or MAC CE.
  • the network device can calculate the second TA based on the received SRS and carry it through the MAC CE Information used to indicate the second TA to be sent to the terminal device.
  • the network device can determine that the received second TA is for the second TRP through the above (method two) TA. That is to say, in addition to feeding back the information of the second TA to the terminal device, the network device can also feed back to the terminal device the identification information of the second TRP associated with the information of the second TA.
  • the terminal device can use the information fed back by the network device to Based on the information indicating the second TA and the identification information of the second TRP, it is determined that the received second TA is a TA for the second TRP.
  • the random access response message or MAC CE may include a field that is used to indicate a TRP-related identity (such as indicating the identification information of the second TRP). Therefore, the terminal device receives a random access response based on the random access response. By entering this field in the response message or MAC CE, it can be determined that the information carried in the random access response message or MAC CE to indicate the second TA is the TA for the second TRP.
  • the information indicating the second TA includes any one of the following: the value of the second TA, or the difference information between the value of the first TA and the value of the second TA. It can be understood that compared with the way in which the network device directly feeds back the value of the second TA to the terminal device, the way in which the network device feeds back the difference information between the value of the first TA and the value of the second TA to the terminal device can reduce the signal Order overhead.
  • the network device calculates the TA of the terminal device for TRP#2 (denoted as TA2). For example, since the network device knows the TA of the terminal device for TRP#1 (denoted as TA1), the network device can The difference between TA2 and TA1 is sent to the terminal device through MAC CE. After the terminal device receives the value (TA2-TA1), it superimposes the value (TA2-TA1) on the basis of TA1 to calculate TA2.
  • the advantage of this method is that directly carrying the value of TA2 will occupy more signaling overhead, while the indication (TA2-TA1) can use fewer bits to complete the indication.
  • the second TA is used for the terminal device to communicate with the second TRP. That is to say, the terminal device can use the second TA to communicate with the second TRP.
  • the terminal device can release the first resource previously configured in S601, which is beneficial to the network.
  • Equipment recycles resources in a timely manner.
  • the terminal device can also update and maintain the TA corresponding to each TRP.
  • the terminal device and network device update and maintain the TA corresponding to the TRP.
  • the terminal device may start the second timer corresponding to the second TRP, or the terminal device may start the second timer corresponding to the TAG to which the second TRP belongs. All TRPs included in one TAG correspond to the same TA. It is understandable that the second TA is considered valid before the second timer expires.
  • the terminal device has previously maintained the first TA corresponding to the first TRP, and the terminal device will also maintain the first timer corresponding to the first TRP or the TAG to which the first TRP belongs. When the first timer expires Previously, the first TA was considered valid.
  • the network device can determine whether it is necessary to send the uplink signal to the first TRP through the uplink signal sent by the terminal device. TRP and/or second TRP to adjust.
  • the network device determines that the TA needs to be adjusted, it can send a TA adjustment command to the terminal device.
  • the command should also allow the terminal device to identify which TRP the adjustment command should apply to.
  • the terminal device can recognize that the adjustment command should be applied to the second TRP in the following two ways:
  • the adjustment command includes identification information of the second TRP (or identification information of the TAG to which the second TRP belongs), and TA update information corresponding to the second TRP.
  • the TA update information is used to update the TA corresponding to the second TRP. TA.
  • the network device can use the second resource to send the adjustment command to the terminal device, accordingly, The terminal device uses the second resource to receive the adjustment command from the network device. Therefore, the adjustment command can be determined to be an adjustment command for the second TRP according to the correspondence between the second resource and the second TRP.
  • the adjustment command includes TA update information corresponding to the second TRP, and the TA update information is used to update the TA corresponding to the second TRP.
  • the network device can send the adjustment command through the beam associated with the second TRP.
  • the terminal device receives data from the network device in the beam or beam direction. According to the corresponding relationship between the beam and the TRP, it can be determined that the adjustment command is an adjustment command for the second TRP.
  • the network device can send a downlink allocation message through the PDCCH corresponding to the second TRP.
  • the downlink allocation message instructs the terminal device how to receive the adjustment command.
  • the terminal device receives the adjustment command from the network device according to the downlink allocation message indicated by the PDCCH. According to the correspondence between the PDCCH and the TRP, it can be determined that the adjustment command is an adjustment command for the second TRP.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device receives the adjustment command for the second TRP from the network device, the terminal device needs to start or restart the second timer corresponding to the second TRP.
  • the terminal device can also recognize that the adjustment command should be applied to the first TRP through the following two methods:
  • the adjustment command includes identification information of the first TRP (or identification information of the TAG to which the first TRP belongs), and TA update information corresponding to the first TRP.
  • the TA update information is used to update the TA corresponding to the first TRP.
  • the terminal device in the process of the terminal device obtaining the first TA communicating with the first TRP, the terminal device has obtained the configuration/resource information related to the first TRP. For example, in a previous configuration, the terminal equipment has obtained the configuration information of the PDCCH resources associated with the first TRP or the configuration information of the beam and/or beam set, then the network equipment can use the resources associated with the first TRP to send the adjustment to the terminal equipment.
  • command correspondingly, the terminal device uses the resource associated with the first TRP to receive the adjustment command from the network device. Therefore, the adjustment command can be determined according to the correspondence between the resource associated with the first TRP and the first TRP.
  • First TRP adjustment command includes TA update information corresponding to the first TRP, and the TA update information is used to update the TA corresponding to the first TRP.
  • the network device can send the adjustment command through the beam associated with the first TRP.
  • the terminal device is in the beam or beam direction. After receiving the adjustment command from the network device, according to the corresponding relationship between the beam and the TRP, it can be determined that the adjustment command is an adjustment command for the first TRP.
  • the network device can send a downlink allocation message through the PDCCH corresponding to the first TRP.
  • the downlink allocation message instructs the terminal device how to receive the adjustment command.
  • the terminal device receives the adjustment command from the network device according to the downlink allocation message indicated by the PDCCH. According to the correspondence between the PDCCH and the TRP, it can be determined that the adjustment command is an adjustment command for the first TRP.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device receives the adjustment command for the first TRP from the network device, the terminal device needs to start or restart the first timer corresponding to the first TRP.
  • the terminal device and network device when any timer times out, the terminal device and network device also need to invalidate the TA maintained by the timer that expires:
  • the terminal device and the network device process the failed TA.
  • the terminal device when the first timer does not time out and the second timer times out, the terminal device performs at least one of the following operations:
  • the terminal device clears the cache of the HARQ process corresponding to the second TRP;
  • the terminal equipment releases the PUCCH resources corresponding to the second TRP and/or the resources corresponding to the uplink reference signal;
  • the terminal device clears the preconfigured downlink allocation resources and uplink authorization resources corresponding to the second TRP;
  • the terminal equipment clears the PUSCH resources associated with the second TRP and used for semi-static channel state information reporting;
  • the terminal device maintains the TA corresponding to the second TRP
  • the terminal device sends indication information to the first TRP according to the first TA.
  • the indication information is used to indicate that the TA corresponding to the second TRP has failed.
  • the above terminal device sends the instruction information to the first TRP according to the first TA, which can also be understood as: when the amount of data to be sent in the terminal device is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the terminal device sends the instruction information to the first TRP according to the first TA. Instructions.
  • This indication information is used to indicate that the TA corresponding to the second TRP fails.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device discovers that the second TA corresponding to the second TRP is invalid, it can immediately notify the network device that the TA corresponding to the second TRP is invalid by sending indication information according to the first TA. In this way, the network device can be informed in a timely manner that the uplink of the terminal device is out of sync, and the network device can adjust the uplink scheduling behavior. For example, the network device will not schedule uplink data in the second TRP in the future.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device discovers that the second TA corresponding to the second TRP is invalid, it may not report immediately, but wait until the amount of data to be sent in the terminal device exceeds the first threshold, and then send the indication information according to the first TA to Inform the network device that the TA corresponding to the second TRP is invalid.
  • the network device when the uplink traffic volume of the terminal device is large, the network device can be notified in time that the uplink of the terminal device is out of sync, and the network device can subsequently enable the terminal to obtain the second TA information again.
  • the above indication information can be used to trigger the network device to send the second message again based on the indication information to trigger the random access process or the SRS sending process and obtain the new TA corresponding to the second TRP.
  • the terminal device may also use the one or more resources to send the second TRP for determining the second TRP.
  • Information of the second TA is a random access preamble, that is, the terminal initiates a random access process
  • the terminal can send a message to the network device during the random access process.
  • Send a cause value which is used to indicate that the reason for triggering the random access process is to obtain the second TA of the second TRP.
  • the cause value may be carried in message 3 of the four-step random access process.
  • the terminal device when the second timer has not expired and the first timer has expired, the terminal device performs at least one of the following operations:
  • the terminal device clears the cache of the HARQ process corresponding to the first TRP
  • the terminal equipment releases the PUCCH resources corresponding to the first TRP and/or the resources corresponding to the uplink reference signal;
  • the terminal device clears the preconfigured downlink allocation resources and uplink authorization resources corresponding to the first TRP;
  • the terminal equipment clears the PUSCH resources associated with the first TRP and used for semi-static channel state information reporting;
  • the terminal device maintains the TA corresponding to the first TRP
  • the terminal device sends indication information to the second TRP according to the second TA.
  • the indication information is used to indicate that the TA corresponding to the first TRP has failed.
  • the above-mentioned terminal device sending the instruction information to the second TRP according to the second TA can also be understood as: when the amount of data to be sent in the terminal device is greater than or equal to the second threshold, the terminal device sends the instruction information to the second TRP according to the second TA. Indication information.
  • the indication information is used to indicate that the TA corresponding to the first TRP has failed.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device discovers that the first TA corresponding to the first TRP is invalid, it can immediately notify the network device that the TA corresponding to the first TRP is invalid by sending indication information according to the second TA. In this way, the network device can be informed in a timely manner that the uplink of the terminal device is out of sync, and the network device can adjust the uplink scheduling behavior. For example, the network device will not schedule uplink data at the first TRP in the future.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device discovers that the first TA corresponding to the first TRP is invalid, it may not report immediately, but wait until the amount of data to be sent in the terminal device exceeds the second threshold, and then send the indication information according to the second TA to Notify the network device that the TA corresponding to the first TRP is invalid.
  • the network device when the uplink traffic volume of the terminal device is large, the network device can be notified in time that the uplink of the terminal device is out of sync, and the network device can subsequently enable the terminal to obtain the first TA information again.
  • the settings of the first threshold and the second threshold may be the same or different, and are not limited here.
  • the above indication information can be used to trigger the network device to send the second message again based on the indication information to trigger the random access process or the SRS transmission process to obtain the new TA corresponding to the first TRP.
  • the terminal device may also use the third resource to send a message for determining the first TRP to the first TRP.
  • the information of the first TA is a random access preamble, that is, the terminal initiates a random access process
  • the terminal can send a request to the network during the random access process.
  • the device sends a cause value, which is used to indicate that the reason for triggering the random access process is to obtain the first TA of the first TRP.
  • the cause value can be carried in message 3 of the four-step random access process.
  • the failure information can be notified to the network equipment through the TRP of the TA valid/uplink synchronization, so that the network equipment can promptly restore the uplink transmission of the terminal equipment to synchronization. status, and restore the mTRP transmission status, which will help improve reliability and transmission capacity.
  • the terminal device when both the first timer and the second timer time out, performs at least one of the following operations:
  • the terminal device clears the cache of the HARQ process corresponding to the first TRP and the second TRP;
  • the terminal equipment releases the PUCCH resources corresponding to the first TRP and the second TRP, and/or the resources corresponding to the uplink reference signal;
  • the terminal device clears the preconfigured downlink allocation resources and uplink authorization resources corresponding to the first TRP and the second TRP;
  • the terminal equipment clears the PUSCH resources associated with the first TRP and the second TRP for semi-static channel state information reporting;
  • the terminal device maintains the TA corresponding to the first TRP and the TA corresponding to the second TRP.
  • the terminal device needs to maintain the invalid TA because the TA update information carried in the adjustment command can be an adjustment amount, and the adjustment amount is adjusted based on the previous TA value, so the terminal device needs to maintain the previously invalid TA.
  • maintenance can also be understood as preservation.
  • first TRP and the second TRP described in the embodiment shown in Figure 6 above may correspond to the same cell, that is, the first TRP and the second TRP are two TRPs corresponding to the same network device, that is, Intra-cell mTRP scenario.
  • the terminal device can also obtain the initial TA of the second TRP, and update and maintain multiple TRPs. of TA. Based on this, terminal equipment can send signals to different TRPs with accurate uplink transmission times, reducing signal interference on the network side and improving communication reliability.
  • the first TRP and the second TRP can also correspond to different cells (ie, Inter-cell mTRP scenario).
  • the first TRP can correspond to cell 1 and the second TRP can correspond to cell 2.
  • the network device that provides services to cell 1 may be recorded as network device 1
  • the network device that provides services to cell 2 may be recorded as network device 2.
  • the following network equipment 1 and network equipment 2 That is the same network device.
  • the following interaction between network device 1 and network device 2 can be understood as an internal implementation of a network device, and is an optional step in the embodiment of this application.
  • the terminal device has obtained the first TA communicating with the first TRP in cell 1 corresponding to network device 1 in advance, and subsequently needs to obtain the second TA communicating with the second TRP in cell 2 corresponding to network device 2.
  • cell 1 corresponding to network device 1 is a serving cell
  • cell 2 corresponding to network device 2 can be called an auxiliary cell or an additional cell.
  • the name of cell 2 is not limited in this embodiment of the application. It can be understood that cell 2 is a cell. 1 provides additional communication resources, such as beam resources.
  • FIG. 7 is another schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the execution subject of steps 700 to 707 is a terminal device or a network device (for example, network device 1 or network device 2), or a chip in the terminal device or network device.
  • the following description takes terminal equipment and network equipment as the execution subjects of the method as examples.
  • the terminal device involved in Figure 7 has obtained the first TA communicating with the first TRP, that is, the embodiment shown in Figure 7 mainly describes TA management in the Inter-cell mTRP scenario.
  • the communication method includes the following steps S700 to S707, where steps S700 to S703 are mainly for the initial TA acquisition description in the Inter-cell mTRP scenario a, and step S704 is mainly for the Inter-cell mTRP Description of TA update and adjustment in scenario a.
  • Step S705 is mainly a description of behavioral processing after TA failure in scenario a of Inter-cell mTRP.
  • Steps S706 to S707 are mainly a solution in an extended scenario. in:
  • Network device 1 and network device 2 exchange information to obtain resources for mTRP transmission.
  • the serving cell (denoted as cell 1) where the terminal equipment is located is provided by network equipment 1.
  • network equipment 1 determines the need to communicate with cell 2 (serviced by network equipment 2) based on the current channel conditions and business traffic conditions, use Inter-cell mTRP
  • network device 1 and network device 2 interact with each other to obtain mTRP transmission configuration information of cell 2.
  • the mTRP transmission configuration information includes the configuration information of the first resource.
  • the configuration information is used by the terminal device to use the first resource to send information for determining the second TA of the second TRP to the network device 2 .
  • step S700 may include: (1) Network device 1 sends a request message to network device 2, the request message is used to request cell 2 to allocate resources for mTRP transmission to the terminal device; (2) Network device 2 sends a request message to the network device 2.
  • Device 1 replies with a response message, which includes the resources allocated by Cell 2 for mTRP transmission to the terminal device. That is, the response message includes mTRP transmission configuration information, where the mTRP transmission configuration information includes one or more Configuration information of resources, wherein the one or more resources include the first resource.
  • the configuration information of the first resource may be the configuration information of the random access resource, or the configuration information of the first resource may be the configuration information of the SRS resource. It can be understood that the configuration information of the random access resources mentioned above can be the configuration information of the resources for non-contention random access. Therefore, after the subsequent terminal device uses the non-contention random access resources to obtain TA, the terminal device The device can release the configuration.
  • the configuration information of the random access resources mentioned above can also be the configuration information of the random access resources used for competition (public resources). Therefore, after the subsequent terminal device uses the public resources to obtain the TA, it can still retain the TA. configuration.
  • step S700 is an optional step.
  • information interaction can be realized by the internal information exchange of the device. .
  • the terminal device obtains the configuration information of the first resource from the network device 1 and the information instructing to obtain the TA.
  • step S601 in the above-mentioned FIG. 6. It is only necessary to replace the network device in step S601 with the network device 1 for understanding, and will not be described again here.
  • the configuration message transmitted by mTRP involved in S701 can be understood as generated by network device 1 based on the configuration information transmitted by mTRP in S700. news.
  • the terminal device uses the first resource to send the information of the second TA used to determine the second TRP to the network device 2 according to the information used to instruct the acquisition of the TA.
  • the network device 2 receives information from the terminal device on the first resource for determining the second TA of the second TRP.
  • step S602 in the above-mentioned FIG. 6. It is only necessary to replace the network device in step S602 with the network device 2 for understanding, and will not be described again here.
  • the identification indication related to the second TRP such as the identification information of the second TRP, in S702 may be the identification information of the second TRP or the identification of the second cell.
  • the terminal device receives information indicating the second TA from the network device 2.
  • the terminal device receiving the information indicating the second TA from the network device 2 can be understood as: the network device 2 can directly send the calculated second TA to the terminal device, for example, in a random access response message or MAC CE, carrying Information indicating the second TA.
  • the terminal device receiving the information indicating the second TA from the network device 2 can also be understood as: the network device 2 will first notify the network device of the calculated second TA through inter-station interaction (or internal implementation of the network device) 1. Then network device 1 notifies the terminal device of the information indicating the second TA through the communication resources of cell 1.
  • the identification indication related to the second TRP such as the identification information of the second TRP, in S703, may be the identification information of the second TRP or the identification of the second cell.
  • the second TA is used for the terminal device to communicate with the second TRP. That is to say, the terminal device can use the second TA to communicate with the second TRP.
  • the terminal device can also update and maintain the TA corresponding to each TRP.
  • the terminal device and the network device update and maintain the TA corresponding to the TRP.
  • step S704 For understanding of S704, please refer to the description of step S604 in Figure 6 above.
  • network device 1 is used to update and maintain the TA corresponding to the first TRP (ie, the first TA)
  • network device 2 is used to update and maintain the TA corresponding to the first TRP (ie, the first TA).
  • Update and maintain the TA corresponding to the second TRP that is, the second TA).
  • the identification indication related to the second TRP such as the identification information of the second TRP, in S704 may be the identification information of the second TRP or the identification of the second cell.
  • the network device 2 when the network device 2 performs maintenance on the second TA, the network device 2 can directly send the adjustment command to the terminal device, or the network device 2 can also first pass the adjustment command through inter-station interaction (or internal implementation of the network device), Notify the network device 1, and the network device 1 sends the adjustment command to the terminal device through the communication resources of the cell 1.
  • the terminal device and network device when any timer times out, the terminal device and network device also need to invalidate the TA maintained by the timer that expires:
  • S705 The terminal device and the network device (network device 1 or network device 2) process the failed TA.
  • the terminal device when the first timer does not time out and the second timer times out, the terminal device performs at least one of the following operations:
  • the terminal device clears the cache of the HARQ process corresponding to the second TRP;
  • the terminal equipment releases the PUCCH resources corresponding to the second TRP and/or the resources corresponding to the uplink reference signal;
  • the terminal device clears the preconfigured downlink allocation resources and uplink authorization resources corresponding to the second TRP;
  • the terminal equipment clears the PUSCH resources associated with the second TRP and used for semi-static channel state information reporting;
  • the terminal device maintains the TA corresponding to the second TRP
  • the terminal device sends indication information to the first TRP according to the first TA.
  • the indication information is used to indicate that the TA corresponding to the second TRP has failed.
  • the above terminal device sends the instruction information to the first TRP according to the first TA, which can also be understood as: when the amount of data to be sent in the terminal device is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the terminal device sends the instruction information to the first TRP according to the first TA. Instructions.
  • This indication information is used to indicate that the TA corresponding to the second TRP fails.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device discovers that the second TA corresponding to the second TRP is invalid, it can immediately notify the network device 1 that the TA corresponding to the second TRP is invalid by sending indication information according to the first TA, and the network device 1 can notify the situation.
  • Internet equipment 2 In this way, the network device 2 can be informed in a timely manner that the uplink of the terminal device is out of sync, and the network device 2 can adjust the uplink scheduling behavior. For example, the network device 2 will not schedule uplink data in the second TRP in the future.
  • the terminal device when cell 1 and cell 2 are deployed on the same site, that is, when network device 1 and network device 2 are the same network device, the terminal device will fail the TA corresponding to the second TRP. After the network device is notified of the situation, the network device can adjust the uplink scheduling behavior on cell 2 or the second TRP.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device discovers that the second TA corresponding to the second TRP is invalid, it may not report immediately, but wait until the amount of data to be sent in the terminal device exceeds the first threshold, and then send the indication information according to the first TA to Notifying network device 1 that the TA corresponding to the second TRP is invalid, network device 1 can directly trigger the terminal device to obtain the second TA, or network device 1 can notify network device 2 of the situation, and network device 2 can subsequently cause the terminal device to obtain the second TA again. information.
  • the network device 1 or 2 can be notified in time that the uplink of the terminal device is out of sync. It should be understood that in a co-site deployment scenario, after the terminal device notifies the network device of the failure of the TA corresponding to the second TRP, the network device can enable the terminal to obtain the information of the second TA again.
  • the above indication information can be used to trigger the network device 1 or the network device 2 to send the second message again based on the indication information to trigger the random access process or the SRS sending process and obtain the new TA corresponding to the second TRP. .
  • the terminal device may also use the first resource to send information for determining the second TA of the second TRP to the second TRP.
  • the information of the second TA in the second TRP is the random access preamble, that is, the terminal initiates the random access process.
  • the terminal can send a cause value to network device 1 during the random access process.
  • the cause value is used to indicate random access.
  • the reason for triggering the access procedure is to obtain the second TA of the second TRP. For example, the reason value may be carried in message 3 of the four-step random access procedure.
  • the terminal device when the second timer has not expired and the first timer has expired, the terminal device performs at least one of the following operations:
  • the terminal device clears the cache of the HARQ process corresponding to the first TRP
  • the terminal equipment releases the PUCCH resources corresponding to the first TRP and/or the resources corresponding to the uplink reference signal;
  • the terminal device clears the preconfigured downlink allocation resources and uplink authorization resources corresponding to the first TRP;
  • the terminal equipment clears the PUSCH resources associated with the first TRP and used for semi-static channel state information reporting;
  • the terminal device maintains the TA corresponding to the first TRP
  • the terminal device sends indication information to the second TRP according to the second TA.
  • the indication information is used to indicate that the TA corresponding to the first TRP has failed. That is to say, when the terminal device discovers that the first TA corresponding to the first TRP is invalid, it needs to immediately notify the network device 2 that the TA corresponding to the first TRP is invalid by sending indication information according to the second TA.
  • the reason is that in Inter-cell mTRP transmission, the TRP (i.e., the first TRP) of the serving cell (i.e., cell 1) will perform more functions.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device feeds back the measured channel state information to network device 1, it will Feedback is provided through the uplink resources of the serving cell, allowing the network side to coordinate the transmission tasks of multiple TRPs for collaborative transmission. Therefore, when the TRP of the serving cell is out of synchronization in the uplink, in order to quickly resume uplink transmission, the terminal device should use the non-invalid TRP Notify network device 2 of this situation.
  • network device 2 can notify network device 1 of the situation.
  • the above indication information can be used to trigger the network device 1 or 2 to send a message based on the indication information to trigger the random access process or the SRS sending process to obtain the new TA corresponding to the first TRP.
  • the terminal device can also send a cause value to the network device 2, where the cause value is used to indicate the reason for triggering the random access process.
  • the cause value is used to indicate the reason for triggering the random access process.
  • the failure information can be notified to the network equipment through the TRP of the TA valid/uplink synchronization, so that the network equipment can promptly restore the uplink transmission of the terminal equipment to synchronization. status, and restore the mTRP transmission status, which will help improve reliability and transmission capacity.
  • the terminal device when both the first timer and the second timer time out, performs at least one of the following operations:
  • the terminal device clears the cache of the HARQ process corresponding to the first TRP and the second TRP;
  • the terminal equipment releases the PUCCH resources corresponding to the first TRP and the second TRP, and/or the resources corresponding to the uplink reference signal;
  • the terminal device clears the preconfigured downlink allocation resources and uplink authorization resources corresponding to the first TRP and the second TRP;
  • the terminal equipment clears the PUSCH resources associated with the first TRP and the second TRP for semi-static channel state information reporting;
  • the terminal device maintains the TA corresponding to the first TRP and the TA corresponding to the second TRP.
  • the terminal device needs to maintain the invalid TA because the TA update information carried in the adjustment command can be an adjustment amount, and the adjustment amount is adjusted based on the previous TA value. Therefore, the terminal device needs to maintain the previously invalid TA. In this application, maintenance can also be understood as preservation.
  • the first TRP corresponds to the source cell
  • the second TRP corresponds to the target cell
  • the source cell and the target cell are different cells.
  • the source cell is a cell managed by network device 1
  • the target cell is managed by network device 2. reasonable community.
  • the source cell and the target cell are two different cells managed by the same network device.
  • the terminal device receives the handover command from the source cell.
  • the terminal device switches from the source cell to the target cell according to the handover command.
  • the handover command instructs the target cell to use the second TA, or the handover command is used to instruct the target cell to use the second TA.
  • the network device can switch the terminal device from cell 1 to cell 2 based on the channel measurement results reported by the terminal device and the load conditions of each cell.
  • the terminal device needs to initiate a random access process in Cell 2 to obtain the TA corresponding to Cell 2 during the handover process from Cell 1 to Cell 2.
  • the terminal device if the terminal device has previously obtained the TA corresponding to cell 2 (i.e., the second TA) through the above steps S700 to S703 or S704, then after the network device sends the switching command to the terminal device, the terminal device During the handover process from cell 1 to cell 2, there is no need to initiate a random access process in cell 2, so the interruption time caused by the handover can be reduced.
  • the handover command may carry an indication of the TA that the terminal equipment should use in cell 2, for example, indicating the value of the second TA, or instructing the target cell to use the second TA.
  • the terminal device may combine the identity of the target cell indicated in the handover command with the cell included in the mTRP transmission configuration message included in the previous step S701. If the identity of the target cell is consistent with the identity of a cell in the configuration message transmitted by mTRP, the terminal device can also use the TA of the cell during mTRP transmission to match the identity of the target cell when switching to the target cell. For uplink transmission, there is no need to perform a random access process.
  • the terminal device can obtain the initial TA of the second TRP and update and maintain the initial TA of multiple TRPs on the premise that it has obtained the first TA communicating with the first TRP. TA. Based on this, terminal equipment can send signals to different TRPs with accurate uplink transmission times, reducing signal interference on the network side and improving communication reliability.
  • FIG. 8 is another schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the execution subject of steps 801 to 805 is a terminal device or a network device, or a chip in a terminal device or a network device.
  • the following description takes terminal equipment and network equipment as the execution subjects of the method as examples.
  • the communication method includes the following steps S801 to S805, where steps S801 to S803 are mainly for the initial TA acquisition description under situation b in the Intra-cell mTRP scenario, and step S804 is mainly for the Intra-cell mTRP Description of the TA update adjustment in case b in the scenario.
  • Step S805 is mainly a description of the behavioral processing after TA failure in case b in the Intra-cell mTRP scenario. in:
  • the network device sends the configuration information of the third resource corresponding to the first TRP and the configuration information of the first resource corresponding to the second TRP to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device receives the configuration information of the third resource corresponding to the first TRP and the configuration information of the first resource corresponding to the second TRP from the network device.
  • the network device sends the configuration information of the third resource corresponding to the first TRP and the configuration information of the first resource corresponding to the second TRP to the terminal device.
  • the network device sends The terminal device sends a switching command, which includes configuration information of the third resource corresponding to the first TRP and configuration information of the first resource corresponding to the second TRP.
  • the terminal device receiving the configuration information of the third resource corresponding to the first TRP and the configuration information of the first resource corresponding to the second TRP from the network device can be understood as: the terminal device receives a switching command from the network device, and the switching command includes the configuration information of the third resource corresponding to the first TRP and the configuration information of the first resource corresponding to the second TRP.
  • the switching command includes the configuration information of the third resource corresponding to the first TRP and the configuration information of the first resource corresponding to the second TRP. It can also be understood that: the switching command includes the configuration information transmitted by mTRP, and the mTRP transmission The configuration information includes configuration information of the third resource corresponding to the first TRP and configuration information of the first resource corresponding to the second TRP.
  • the configuration information transmitted by mTRP includes the configuration information of the third resource corresponding to the first TRP and the configuration information of the first resource corresponding to the second TRP.
  • the configuration information transmitted by mTRP includes: The corresponding relationship between the third resource and the first TRP, and the corresponding relationship between the first resource and the second TRP.
  • the correspondence between the third resource and the first TRP includes the configuration information of the third resource and the identification information of the first TRP
  • the correspondence between the first resource and the second TRP includes the configuration information of the first resource and the identification of the second TRP. information.
  • the mTRP transmission configuration information sent by the network device to the terminal device may not include the identification information of the TRP corresponding to the resource, but only include the configuration information of the resource.
  • the terminal device only knows the configured resources (that is, the configuration information of the resources) through the configuration information transmitted by the mTRP in the switching command, but does not know which TRP the configured resources are specifically configured for.
  • the terminal device may know which TRP the subsequently received TA information corresponds to by referring to the method described in step S803 below, which will not be described in detail here.
  • the configuration information of the third resource involved in this application may include the configuration information of the random access resource associated with the first TRP, or the configuration information of the third resource may include the configuration information of the third resource associated with the first TRP.
  • Configuration information of SRS resources may include a beam (or beam direction) associated with the first TRP, a preamble of the random access associated with the first TRP, One or more of the following: domain resources, frequency domain resources, mapping relationships between beams and time domain resources and frequency domain resources.
  • the configuration information of the SRS resources associated with the first TRP may include the beam (or beam direction) associated with the first TRP, the SRS associated with the first TRP, time domain resources, and frequency domain resources. , one or more of the mapping relationships between beams and time domain resources and frequency domain resources, identification information of the first TRP, identification information of the cell corresponding to the first TRP, and other configurations.
  • the configuration information of the first resource involved in this application may include the configuration information of the random access resource associated with the second TRP, or the configuration information of the first resource may include the configuration information of the SRS resource associated with the second TRP.
  • Configuration information For example, the configuration information of random access resources associated with the second TRP may include a beam (or beam direction) associated with the second TRP, a preamble of the random access associated with the second TRP, One or more of the following: domain resources, frequency domain resources, mapping relationships between beams and time domain resources and frequency domain resources.
  • the configuration information of the SRS resources associated with the second TRP may include the beam (or beam direction) associated with the second TRP, the SRS associated with the second TRP, time domain resources, and frequency domain resources. , one or more of the mapping relationships between beams and time domain resources and frequency domain resources, identification information of the second TRP, identification information of the cell corresponding to the second TRP, and other configurations.
  • the correspondence between the above resources and the identification information of the TRP can enable subsequent terminal devices to use a certain resource to send information for determining the TA of a certain TRP, based on the relationship between the resource and the identification information of the TRP.
  • the corresponding relationship can determine which TRP corresponds to the TA received later. That is to say, the terminal device can determine that the first TA corresponds to the first TRP based on the corresponding relationship between the third resource and the first TRP; and can determine that the second TA corresponds to the second TRP based on the corresponding relationship between the first resource and the second TRP. TRP.
  • the terminal device uses a third resource to send information for determining the first TA of the first TRP to the first TRP, and uses the first resource to send information for determining the second TA of the second TRP to the second TRP.
  • the network device receives information from the terminal device for determining the first TA of the first TRP through the first TRP, and receives information from the terminal device for determining the second TA of the second TRP through the second TRP.
  • the terminal device receives information indicating the first TA and information indicating the second TA from the network device.
  • the terminal device receiving information indicating the first TA and information indicating the second TA from the network device can be understood as: the terminal device receives a third message from the network device, and the third message includes information indicating the first TA. information and information indicating the second TA. That is to say, the information indicating the first TA and the information indicating the second TA can be carried and sent in one message at the same time.
  • the terminal device receiving the information indicating the first TA and the information indicating the second TA from the network device can be understood as: the terminal device receives a fourth message from the network device, and the fourth message includes indicating the first TA. information; the terminal device receives a fifth message from the network device, and the fifth message includes information indicating the second TA.
  • the network device can reply with two messages, each message including information about the TA corresponding to a TRP.
  • the terminal device can determine which TRP the subsequently received TA is for based on the correspondence between the resource and the identification information of the TRP. That is to say, the terminal device may determine that the first TA corresponds to the first TRP based on the corresponding relationship between the third resource and the first TRP, and determine that the second TA corresponds to the second TRP based on the corresponding relationship between the first resource and the second TRP. TRP.
  • the network device can send the information indicating the first TA and the second TA to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device may also send an identity indicator indicating that the TRP is related. Therefore, the terminal device may determine that the first TA received corresponds to the first TRP, and the second TA corresponds to the second TRP.
  • the third message includes the corresponding relationship between the first TA and the first TRP, and the corresponding relationship between the second TA and the second TRP; wherein, the corresponding relationship between the first TA and the first TRP includes instructions for indicating the first
  • the terminal device can according to the first TA and the first TRP.
  • the first TA is determined to correspond to the first TRP according to the corresponding relationship between the TRPs
  • the second TA is determined to correspond to the second TRP based on the corresponding relationship between the second TA and the second TRP.
  • the fourth message includes the corresponding relationship between the first TA and the first TRP, where the corresponding relationship between the first TA and the first TRP includes information indicating the first TA and the identification information of the first TRP.
  • the fifth message It also includes a corresponding relationship between the second TA and the second TRP, where the corresponding relationship between the second TA and the second TRP includes information indicating the second TA and the identification information of the second TRP. Therefore, the terminal device can operate according to the first TA.
  • the first TA is determined to correspond to the first TRP based on the corresponding relationship with the first TRP
  • the second TA is determined to correspond to the second TRP based on the corresponding relationship between the second TA and the second TRP.
  • the terminal device can also update and maintain the TA corresponding to each TRP.
  • the terminal device and network device update and maintain the TA corresponding to the TRP.
  • step S804 please refer to the description of step S604 in FIG. 6 above, which will not be described again here.
  • the terminal device and network device when any timer times out, the terminal device and network device also need to invalidate the TA maintained by the timer that expires:
  • the terminal device and the network device process the failed TA.
  • step S805 please refer to the description of step S605 in FIG. 6 above, which will not be described again here.
  • the terminal device can obtain the initial TA of the first TRP and the initial TA of the second TRP at the same time, and update and maintain the TA of multiple TRPs. Based on this, terminal equipment can send signals to different TRPs with accurate uplink transmission times, reducing signal interference on the network side and improving communication reliability.
  • the first TRP and the second TRP correspond to different cells.
  • the first TRP corresponds to cell 1
  • the second TRP corresponds to cell 1.
  • the second TRP corresponds to cell 2.
  • the network device that provides services to cell 1 may be recorded as network device 1
  • the network device that provides services to cell 2 may be recorded as network device 2.
  • cell 1 and cell 2 can also be two cells deployed on the same site, that is, network device 1 and network device 2 are the same device. Therefore, in the following step descriptions, the two cells
  • the interactive signaling and processes between network devices can be understood as the internal implementation of the network device in the same-site deployment scenario.
  • FIG. 9 is another schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the execution subject of steps 900 to 905 is a terminal device or a network device (for example, network device 1 or network device 2), or a chip in the terminal device or network device.
  • the following description takes terminal equipment and network equipment as the execution subjects of the method as examples.
  • the communication method includes the following steps S900 to S905, of which steps S900 to S903 are mainly for the initial TA acquisition description under situation b in the Inter-cell mTRP scenario, and step S904 is mainly for the Inter-cell mTRP Description of the TA update adjustment in case b in the scenario.
  • Step S905 is mainly a description of the behavioral processing after TA failure in case b in the Inter-cell mTRP scenario. in:
  • Network device 1 and network device 2 exchange information to obtain resources for mTRP transmission.
  • step S900 please refer to the description of step S700 in FIG. 7 above, which will not be described again here.
  • the network device 1 sends the configuration information of the third resource corresponding to the first TRP and the configuration information of the first resource corresponding to the second TRP to the terminal device.
  • step S801 for understanding of S901, please refer to the description of step S801 in FIG. 8 . It is only necessary to replace the network device in step S801 with network device 1 for understanding, and will not be described again here.
  • the terminal device uses the third resource to send information for determining the first TA of the first TRP to the first TRP, and uses the first resource to send information for determining the second TA of the second TRP to the second TRP.
  • step S802 in FIG. 8 please refer to the description of step S802 in FIG. 8 above, which will not be described again here.
  • the terminal device receives information indicating the first TA and information indicating the second TA from the network device (network device 1 and/or network device 2).
  • the terminal device receiving the information indicating the first TA and the information indicating the second TA from the network device 2 can be understood as: the network device 1 first calculates the first TA through inter-station interaction (or internal implementation of the network device) , inform network device 2, and then network device 2 The received information of the first TA and the calculated information of the second TA are sent to the terminal device through the communication resources of cell 2.
  • the terminal device receiving the information indicating the first TA and the information indicating the second TA from the network device 1 can be understood as: the network device 2 first calculates the second TA through inter-station interaction (or internal implementation of the network device) , inform the network device 1, and then the network device 1 notifies the terminal device of the received second TA and the calculated first TA information through the communication resources of the cell 1.
  • the terminal device receiving the information indicating the first TA and the information indicating the second TA from the network device 1 and the network device 2 can be understood as: the network device 1 notifies the calculated first TA to the terminal device, and the network device 2 will calculate the first TA.
  • the second TA informs the terminal device.
  • the terminal device and the network device update and maintain the TA corresponding to the TRP.
  • step S904 For understanding of S904, please refer to the description of step S804 in Figure 8 above.
  • the difference is that network device 1 is used to update and maintain the TA corresponding to the first TRP (ie, the first TA), and network device 2 is used to update and maintain the TA corresponding to the first TRP (ie, the first TA).
  • Update and maintain the TA corresponding to the second TRP that is, the second TA).
  • the terminal device and the network device process the failed TA.
  • step S805 for understanding of S905, please refer to the description of step S805 in Figure 8 above.
  • the difference is that network device 1 is used to update and maintain the TA corresponding to the first TRP (ie, the first TA), and network device 2 is used to update and maintain the TA corresponding to the first TRP (ie, the first TA).
  • Update and maintain the TA corresponding to the second TRP that is, the second TA).
  • the terminal device can obtain the initial TA of the first TRP and the initial TA of the second TRP at the same time, and update and maintain the TA of multiple TRPs. Based on this, terminal equipment can send signals to different TRPs with accurate uplink transmission times, reducing signal interference on the network side and improving communication reliability.
  • Figure 10 is another schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the execution subject of steps 1001 to 1003 is a terminal device or a network device, or a chip in a terminal device or a network device.
  • the following description takes terminal equipment and network equipment as the execution subjects of the method as examples.
  • the terminal device involved in Figure 10 has obtained the first TA communicating with the first TRP, that is, the embodiment shown in Figure 10 mainly describes TA management in another Intra-cell mTRP scenario.
  • the communication method includes the following steps S1001 to S1003.
  • Step S1001 is mainly for the initial TA acquisition description in the Intra-cell mTRP scenario a
  • Step S1002 is mainly for the Intra-cell mTRP scenario.
  • Description of TA update adjustment under a is mainly a description of behavioral processing after TA failure under a in the Intra-cell mTRP scenario. in:
  • the network device sends an mTRP transmission configuration message to the terminal device, where the mTRP transmission configuration message includes information indicating the second TA.
  • the terminal device receives the configuration message of the multi-transmission reception point mTRP transmission from the network device.
  • the network device when the network device learns the distance between the terminal device and the second TRP through positioning, the network device can directly estimate the value of the second TA. Specifically, the network device calculates the propagation time in space of the uplink signal sent by the terminal device based on the distance between the terminal device and the second TRP, and then estimates the value of the second TA.
  • the network device may determine that the value of the second TA is 0. Specifically, within the geographical area served by the second TRP, multiple terminal devices use a TA value of 0 to send uplink messages. The time difference between the uplink signals of multiple terminal devices reaching the second TRP is smaller, and the interference generated is also smaller. The network device can still correctly decode the uplink messages sent by multiple terminal devices.
  • the network device may instruct the terminal device to use the TA of the first TRP to communicate with the second TRP, that is, the value of the second TA. Same value as the first TA.
  • the network device can send a specific value to the terminal device, which value is the same as the value of the first TA; for another example, the network device can send an inheritance indication to the terminal device, and the inheritance indication is used to instruct the terminal device to inherit the first TA. As the second TA.
  • the network device can transmit a configuration message to the mTRP.
  • the configuration message transmitted by the mTRP includes information indicating the second TA, where the second TA is the TA corresponding to the second TRP, and the second TA is used for the terminal device to communicate with the mTRP.
  • Second TRP communication includes any of the following: the value of the second TA, or the difference information between the value of the first TA and the value of the second TA, or the instructions of other TAs. information.
  • step S1001 the network device has sent the first TA corresponding to the first TRP to the terminal device, and the first TA is used for the terminal device to communicate with the first TRP. That is to say, before step S1001, the terminal device has acquired the first TA communicating with the first TRP.
  • the configuration message transmitted by mTRP includes information indicating the second TA, which can be understood as: mTRP transmitted
  • the configuration message includes identification information of the second TRP and information indicating the second TA. Therefore, the terminal device can determine that the received second TA is the TA corresponding to the second TRP based on the received identification information of the second TRP.
  • the configuration message transmitted by mTRP sent by the network device to the terminal device may not include the identification information of the TRP, but only include information indicating the second TA. That is to say, the configuration message transmitted by the terminal device through mTRP , only the information of the second TA is known, but not which TRP the second TA corresponds to. In this case, if the terminal device wants to know which TRP the second TA is for, it can match the configuration message transmitted by the mTRP with the TRP The association between corresponding parameter names is determined. For example, the mTRP transmission configuration associated with parameter name 1 corresponds to TRP1, and the mTRP transmission configuration associated with parameter name 2 corresponds to TRP2.
  • the terminal device can determine that the second TA corresponds to the second TRP according to the association between the parameter name and the TRP. Alternatively, it can also be determined based on the association between the resources in the configuration message transmitted by mTRP and the parameter name corresponding to the TRP. For example, the resource configuration associated with parameter name 1 corresponds to TRP1, and the resource configuration associated with parameter name 2 corresponds to TRP2. Therefore, the terminal device can determine that the second TA corresponds to the second TRP according to the association between the parameter name and the TRP.
  • the terminal device and network device update and maintain the TA corresponding to the TRP.
  • step S1002 please refer to the description of step S604 in FIG. 6 above, which will not be described again here.
  • the terminal device and network device process the failed TA.
  • step S1003 please refer to the description of step S605 in FIG. 6 above, which will not be described again here.
  • the terminal device on the premise that the terminal device has obtained the first TA communicating with the first TRP, it can also indicate the second TA based on the configuration message carried in the received mTRP transmission. information to determine the initial TA of the second TRP. Furthermore, the terminal device and the network device can subsequently update and maintain the TA of multiple TRPs. Based on this, terminal equipment can send signals to different TRPs with accurate uplink transmission times, reducing signal interference on the network side and improving communication reliability.
  • Figure 11 is another schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the execution subject of steps 1100 to 1103 is a terminal device or a network device (for example, network device 1 or network device 2), or a chip in the terminal device or network device.
  • the following description takes terminal equipment and network equipment as the execution subjects of the method as examples.
  • the terminal device involved in Figure 11 has obtained the first TA communicating with the first TRP, that is, the embodiment shown in Figure 11 mainly describes TA management in the Inter-cell mTRP scenario.
  • the communication method includes the following steps S1100 to S1103, where steps S1100 to S1101 are mainly for the initial TA acquisition description in situation b in the Inter-cell mTRP scenario, and step S1102 is mainly for Inter-cell mTRP Description of TA update adjustment in case b in the scenario.
  • Step S1103 is mainly a description of the behavioral processing after TA failure in case b in the Inter-cell mTRP scenario. in:
  • Network device 1 and network device 2 exchange information to obtain resources for mTRP transmission.
  • step S1100 may include: (1) Network device 1 sends a request message to network device 2, the request message is used to request cell 2 to allocate resources for mTRP transmission to the terminal device; (2) Network device 2 sends a request message to the network device 2.
  • Device 1 replies with a response message.
  • the response message includes the resources allocated by Cell 2 for the terminal device for mTRP transmission. That is, the response message includes the configuration information of mTRP transmission, and the configuration information of mTRP transmission includes the second TA. .
  • step S1100 is an optional step.
  • information interaction can be realized by the internal information exchange of the device. .
  • the terminal device obtains a configuration message transmitted by mTRP from network device 1.
  • the configuration message transmitted by mTRP includes information indicating the second TA.
  • step S1001 in the above-mentioned FIG. 10. It is only necessary to replace the network device in step S1001 with the network device 1 for understanding, and will not be described again here.
  • the mTRP transmission configuration message sent by the network device 1 to the terminal device in step S1101 can be understood as a message generated by the network device 1 based on the mTRP transmission configuration information in S1100.
  • the terminal device can also update and maintain the TA corresponding to each TRP.
  • the terminal device and the network device update and maintain the TA corresponding to the TRP.
  • step S704 in FIG. 7 please refer to the description of step S704 in FIG. 7 above, which will not be described again here.
  • the terminal device and network device when any timer times out, the terminal device and network device also need to respond to the timeout.
  • the TA maintained by the timer is invalidated:
  • the terminal device and network device process the failed TA.
  • step S1103 please refer to the description of step S705 in FIG. 7 above, which will not be described again here.
  • the terminal device on the premise that the terminal device has obtained the first TA communicating with the first TRP, it can also indicate the second TA based on the configuration message carried in the received mTRP transmission. information to determine the initial TA of the second TRP. Furthermore, the terminal device and the network device can subsequently update and maintain the TA of multiple TRPs. Based on this, terminal equipment can send signals to different TRPs with accurate uplink transmission times, reducing signal interference on the network side and improving communication reliability.
  • the communication device provided by the present application will be described in detail below with reference to FIGS. 12 to 15 .
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device shown in Figure 12 can be used to perform some or all functions of the terminal device in the method embodiments described in Figures 5 to 11.
  • the device may be a terminal device, a device in the terminal device, or a device that can be used in conjunction with the terminal device.
  • the communication device may also be a chip system.
  • the communication device shown in FIG. 12 may include a transceiver unit 1201 and a processing unit 1202. Among them, the processing unit 1202 is used for data processing.
  • the transceiver unit 1201 integrates a receiving unit and a transmitting unit.
  • the transceiver unit 1201 may also be called a communication unit. Alternatively, the transceiver unit 1201 may also be split into a receiving unit and a transmitting unit.
  • the following processing unit 1202 and transceiver unit 1201 are the same, and will not be described again below. in:
  • Transceiver unit 1201 used to obtain the configuration information of the first resource from the network device and the information indicating to obtain the TA;
  • the processing unit 1202 is configured to use the first resource to send the information of the second TA for determining the second TRP to the network device through the transceiver unit 1201 according to the information indicating the acquisition of the TA;
  • the transceiver unit 1201 is configured to receive information indicating the second TA from the network device, and the second TA is used for the terminal device to communicate with the second TRP.
  • the transceiver unit 1201 is configured to receive configuration information of the third resource corresponding to the first TRP and configuration information of the first resource corresponding to the second TRP from the network device;
  • the transceiver unit 1201 is configured to use the third resource to send information for determining the first TA of the first TRP to the first TRP, and use the first resource to send information to the second TRP. Information about the second TA used to determine the second TRP;
  • the transceiver unit 1201 is configured to receive information indicating the first TA and information indicating the second TA from the network device.
  • the transceiver unit 1201 is configured to receive a configuration message for multi-transmission reception point mTRP transmission from a network device.
  • the configuration message for mTRP transmission includes information indicating a second TA, and the second TA is a TA corresponding to the second TRP, so
  • the information indicating the second TA includes any one of the following: the value of the second TA, or the difference information between the value of the first TA and the value of the second TA;
  • the processing unit 1202 is configured to use the second TA to communicate with the second TRP.
  • Figure 13 is a schematic structural diagram of another communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device shown in Figure 13 can be used to perform some or all functions of the network device in the method embodiments described in Figures 5 to 11.
  • the device may be a network device, a device in the network device, or a device that can be used in conjunction with the network device.
  • the communication device may also be a chip system.
  • the communication device shown in FIG. 13 may include a transceiver unit 1301. in:
  • the transceiver unit 1301 is configured to send the first timing advance TA corresponding to the first transmission reception point TRP to the terminal device, where the first TA is used for the terminal device to communicate with the first TRP;
  • the transceiver unit 1301 is configured to send the configuration information of the first resource and information indicating the acquisition of TA to the terminal device;
  • the transceiver unit 1301 is configured to receive the second TA information for determining the second TRP sent by the terminal device using the first resource in response to the information for instructing to obtain the TA;
  • the transceiver unit 1301 is configured to send information indicating the second TA to the terminal device, and the second TA is used for the terminal device to communicate with the second TRP.
  • the transceiver unit 1301 is configured to send the configuration information of the third resource corresponding to the first TRP and the configuration information of the first resource corresponding to the second TRP to the terminal device;
  • the transceiver unit 1301 is configured to receive information from the terminal device for determining the first TA of the first TRP through the first TRP, and receive information from the terminal device through the second TRP. Information used to determine the second TA of the second TRP;
  • the transceiver unit 1301 is configured to send information indicating the first TA and information indicating the second TA to the terminal device.
  • the transceiver unit 1301 is configured to send the first timing advance TA corresponding to the first transmission reception point TRP to the terminal device, where the first TA is used for the terminal device to communicate with the first TRP;
  • the transceiver unit 1301 is configured to send a configuration message for multi-transmission reception point mTRP transmission to the terminal device.
  • the configuration message for mTRP transmission includes information indicating a second TA, and the second TA is a TA corresponding to the second TRP,
  • the information indicating the second TA includes any one of the following: the value of the second TA, or the difference information between the value of the first TA and the value of the second TA.
  • the second TA is used for the terminal device to communicate with the second TRP.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of another communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device may be the access network equipment described in the embodiment of this application.
  • the access network equipment includes: a baseband device 141, a radio frequency device 142, and an antenna 143.
  • the radio frequency device 142 receives the information sent by the terminal device through the antenna 143, and sends the information sent by the terminal device to the baseband device 141 for processing.
  • the baseband device 141 processes the information of the terminal equipment and sends it to the radio frequency device 142.
  • the radio frequency device 142 processes the information of the terminal equipment and then sends it to the terminal equipment through the antenna 143.
  • the baseband device 141 includes one or more processing units 1411, a storage unit 1412 and an interface 1414.
  • the processing unit 1411 is used to support the network device to perform the functions of the network device in the above method embodiment.
  • the storage unit 1412 is used to store software programs and/or data.
  • the interface 1414 is used to exchange information with the radio frequency device 142.
  • the interface includes an interface circuit for input and output of information.
  • the processing unit is an integrated circuit, such as one or more application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), or one or more digital signal processors (DSPs), or , one or more field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), or a combination of these types of integrated circuits. These integrated circuits can be integrated together to form a chip.
  • ASICs application specific integrated circuits
  • DSPs digital signal processors
  • FPGAs field programmable gate arrays
  • the storage unit 1412 and the processing unit 1411 may be located in the same chip, that is, an on-chip storage element. Alternatively, the storage unit 1412 and the processing unit 1411 may be on different chips from the processing unit 1411, that is, off-chip storage elements.
  • the storage unit 1412 may be one memory, or may be a collective name for multiple memories or storage elements.
  • the access network device may implement some or all of the steps in the above method embodiments in the form of one or more processing unit schedulers. For example, the corresponding functions of the network devices in Figures 5 to 11 are implemented.
  • the one or more processing units may support wireless access technologies of the same standard, or may support wireless access technologies of different standards.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of another communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device may be the terminal device described in the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 15 only shows the main components of the terminal device 1500 .
  • the terminal device 1500 includes a processor, a memory, a control circuit, an antenna, and an input and output device.
  • the processor is mainly used to process communication protocols and communication data, control the entire terminal device 1500, execute software programs, and process data of the software programs.
  • Memory is mainly used to store software programs and data.
  • the control circuit is mainly used for conversion of baseband signals and radio frequency signals and processing of radio frequency signals.
  • Antennas are mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • Input and output devices such as touch screens, display screens, microphones, keyboards, etc., are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users.
  • the processor can read the software program in the storage unit, interpret and execute the instructions of the software program, and process the data of the software program.
  • the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent and outputs the baseband signal to the control circuit.
  • the control circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal and then sends the radio frequency signal out in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna.
  • the control circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor.
  • the processor converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data. .
  • FIG. 15 only shows one memory and processor.
  • terminal device 1500 may include multiple processors and memories.
  • the memory may also be called a storage medium or a storage device, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the processor may include a baseband processor and a central processor.
  • the baseband processor is mainly used to process communication protocols and communication data.
  • the central processor is mainly used to control the entire terminal device 1500. Execute software programs, process software software program data.
  • the processor in Figure 15 integrates the functions of a baseband processor and a central processor. Those skilled in the art can understand that the baseband processor and the central processor can also be independent processors and are interconnected through technologies such as buses.
  • the terminal device 1500 may include multiple baseband processors to adapt to different network standards, the terminal device 1500 may include multiple central processors to enhance its processing capabilities, and various components of the terminal device 1500 may be connected through various buses.
  • the baseband processor can also be expressed as a baseband processing circuit or a baseband processing chip.
  • the central processing unit can also be expressed as a central processing circuit or a central processing chip.
  • the function of processing communication protocols and communication data can be built into the processor, or can be stored in the storage unit in the form of a software program, and the processor executes the software program to implement the baseband processing function.
  • the antenna and the control circuit with the transceiver function can be regarded as the transceiver unit 1510 of the terminal device 1500
  • the processor with the processing function can be regarded as the processing unit 1520 of the terminal device 1500
  • the terminal device 1500 includes a transceiver unit 1510 and a processing unit 1520.
  • the transceiver unit may also be called a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiver device, etc.
  • the devices used to implement the receiving function in the transceiving unit 1510 can be regarded as receiving units
  • the devices used in the transceiving unit 1510 used to implement the transmitting function can be regarded as sending units.
  • the transceiving unit 1510 includes a receiving unit and a transmitting unit.
  • the receiving unit may also be called a receiver, a receiver, a receiving circuit, etc.
  • the sending unit may be called a transmitter, a transmitter, a transmitting circuit, etc.
  • Embodiments of the present application also provide a computer-readable storage medium. Instructions are stored in the computer-readable storage medium. When the instruction is run on a processor, the method flow of the above method embodiment is implemented.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product.
  • the computer program product is run on a processor, the method flow of the above method embodiment is implemented.
  • the disclosed systems, devices and methods can be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical functional division.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated.
  • the components shown may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed over multiple network units. Some or all of the units can be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
  • the functions are implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, they can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application is essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product.
  • the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in various embodiments of this application.
  • the aforementioned computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer.
  • computer-readable media can include random access memory (random access memory, RAM), read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), Erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), compact disc read-only memory (CD- ROM), universal serial bus flash disk, portable hard disk, or other optical disk storage, magnetic disk storage media, or other magnetic storage devices, or can be used to carry or store desired data in the form of instructions or data structures. program code and any other medium that can be accessed by a computer.
  • RAM random access memory
  • read-only memory read-only memory
  • ROM programmable read-only memory
  • PROM programmable read-only memory
  • Erasable programmable read-only memory Erasable programmable read-only memory
  • EPROM electrically erasable programmable read-only memory
  • EEPROM electrically erasable programmable read-only
  • RAM random access memory
  • SRAM static random access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • DRAM synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • ESDRAM enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • SLDRAM synchronous link dynamic random access memory
  • direct rambus RAM direct rambus RAM, DR RAM

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请提供了一种通信方法及相关装置,该方法适用于已获取与第一TRP通信的第一TA的终端设备。该方法包括:终端设备获取来自网络设备的第一资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息。终端设备根据用于指示获取TA的信息,使用第一资源向网络设备发送用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息。终端设备接收来自网络设备的指示第二TA的信息,第二TA用于终端设备与第二TRP通信。基于本申请实施例中的方案,可提高上行发送的准确性。

Description

通信方法及相关装置
本申请要求于2022年08月11日提交中国专利局、申请号为202210963748.6,发明名称为“通信方法及相关装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种通信方法及相关装置。
背景技术
在无线通信系统中,可以由多个传输接收点(transmission reception point,TRP)为用户设备(user equipment,UE)提供通信服务。多个TRP为物理位置上分离的多个天线或者同一天线上的多个天线阵列,组成multiple TRPs(即mTRP),形成不同的空间信道,并通过空间信道的不相关性,形成最大波束赋形增益或空间分集可靠性增益,以增强覆盖或可靠性。
定时提前(timing advance,TA)指的是UE向网络设备发送上行信号的定时提前量,即UE根据TA确定发送上行信号的时刻。目前,针对mTRP传输,多个TRP对应的一个公共的TA,即UE根据一个公共的TA向mTRP发送上行信号,该方式发送上行信号的准确度低。
发明内容
本申请提供了一种通信方法及相关装置,可提高上行信号发送的准确度。
第一方面,本申请提供了一种通信方法,该方法适用于终端设备或终端设备中的芯片,以下以终端设备为方法的执行主体为例进行说明,其中该终端设备已获取与第一传输接收点TRP通信的第一定时提前TA。该方法包括:
所述终端设备获取来自网络设备的第一资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息;
所述终端设备根据所述用于指示获取TA的信息,使用所述第一资源向所述网络设备发送用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息;
所述终端设备接收来自所述网络设备的指示所述第二TA的信息,所述第二TA用于所述终端设备与所述第二TRP通信。
在本申请中,当终端设备已获取与第一TRP通信的第一TA(即终端设备已进行单TRP传输)时,若网络设备确定该终端设备适合mTRP传输,则网络设备可以指示该终端设备进行mTRP传输,并指示终端设备获取第二TRP对应的第二TA。其中,当终端设备获取到第二TA之后,在后续通信中,终端设备能够以准确的上行发送时间,向不同的TRP发送信号。
在一种可能的实现中,所述终端设备获取来自网络设备的第一资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息,包括:
所述终端设备获取来自所述网络设备的多传输接收点mTRP传输的配置消息,所述mTRP传输的配置消息包括所述第一资源的配置信息和所述用于指示获取TA的信息。
在该种实现方式下,网络设备可以通过一条消息(即mTRP传输的配置消息)下发第一资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息,可节省信令开销。
在一种可能的实现中,所述终端设备获取来自网络设备的第一资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息,包括:
所述终端设备获取来自所述网络设备的多传输接收点mTRP传输的配置消息,所述mTRP传输的配置消息包括所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系以及所述用于指示获取TA的信息,所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系包括所述第一资源的配置信息和所述第二TRP的标识信息;
所述方法还包括:
所述终端设备根据所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系,确定所述第二TA对应于所述第二TRP。
在该种实现方式下,mTRP传输的配置消息中包括第一资源和第二TRP的对应关系,有利于后续终端设备根据第一资源和第二TRP的对应关系,确定后续接收到的第二TA对应于第二TRP。
在一种可能的实现中,所述终端设备获取来自网络设备的第一资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息,包括:
所述终端设备接收来自所述网络设备的第一消息,所述第一消息包括一个或者多个资源的配置信息,所述一个或者多个资源包括所述第一资源;
所述终端设备接收来自所述网络设备的第二消息,所述第二消息包括用于指示获取TA的信息。
在该种实现方式下,网络设备可以通过两条消息下发第一资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息,例如第一消息承载一个或者多个资源的配置信息,第二消息承载用于指示获取TA的信息,这种通过两条消息分别指示第一资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息的方式更加灵活。
在一种可能的实现中,所述第一消息为mTRP传输的配置消息,所述第二消息为物理下行控制信道命令PDCCH order。
在一种可能的实现中,所述第一消息还包括所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系,所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系包括所述第一资源的配置信息和第二TRP的标识信息;
所述方法还包括:
所述终端设备根据所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系,确定所述第二TA对应于所述第二TRP。
在该种实现方式下,第一消息中还包括所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系,有利于后续终端设备根据第一资源和第二TRP的对应关系,确定后续接收到的第二TA对应于第二TRP。
在一种可能的实现中,所述第二消息还包括所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系,所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系包括所述第一资源的指示信息和所述第二TRP的标识信息;
所述方法还包括:
所述终端设备根据所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系,确定所述第二TA对应于所述第二TRP。
在该种实现方式中,第二消息中还包括第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系,有利于后续终端设备根据第一资源和第二TRP的对应关系,确定后续接收到的第二TA对应于第二TRP。
在一种可能的实现中,所述终端设备接收来自所述网络设备的用于指示所述第二TA的信息,包括:
所述终端设备接收来自所述网络设备的所述第二TA和所述第二TRP的对应关系,所述第二TA和所述第二TRP的对应关系包括用于指示所述第二TA的信息和所述第二TRP的标识信息;
所述方法还包括:
所述终端设备根据所述第二TA和所述第二TRP的对应关系,确定所述第二TA对应于所述第二TRP。
在该种实现方式下,网络设备在下发第二TA的信息的同时,下发第二TRP的标识信息,有利于后续终端设备识别接收到的第二TA对应于第二TRP。
在一种可能的实现中,所述第一资源为以下任意一项:
波束、随机接入的资源、或探测参考信号SRS的资源。
在一种可能的实现中,所述方法还包括:
所述终端设备接收来自所述网络设备的调整命令,所述调整命令中包括所述第二TRP的标识信息和所述第二TRP对应的TA更新信息,所述TA更新信息用于更新所述第二TA。
在该种实现方式下,可以通过调整命令对多TRP对应的TA进行更新维护,例如,以对第二TRP对应的TA进行更新为例,调整命令中可以包括第二TRP的标识信息和第二TRP对应的TA更新信息,因此终端设备可以根据第二TRP的标识信息可确定该调整命令为针对第二TRP对应的TA的调整命令,进而可以根据第二TRP对应的TA更新信息更新第二TA以得到更准确的TA值,有利于提高基于第二TA向第二TRP发送上行信号的准确度。
在一种可能的实现中,所述mTRP传输的配置信息中还包括以下所述第二TRP对应的第二资源的配置信息中的至少一项:
物理下行控制信道PDCCH资源的配置信息,物理上行控制信道PUCCH资源的配置信息,用于半静态信道状态信息上报的物理上行共享信道PUSCH资源的配置信息,下行分配资源的配置信息,上行授权资源的配置信息,波束和/或波束集的配置信息,上行参考信号对应的资源的配置信息。
在一种可能的实现中,所述方法还包括:
所述终端设备使用所述第二资源接收来自所述网络设备的调整命令,所述调整命令中包括所述第二TRP对应的TA更新信息,所述TA更新信息用于更新所述第二TA;
所述终端设备根据所述第二资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系,确定所述调整命令对应于所述第二TRP,所述第二资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系包括所述第二资源的配置信息和所述第二TRP的标识信息。
在该种实现方式下,可以通过资源区分该调整命令为针对哪个TRP的TA的调整,因此,获取到更为准确的TA值,进而有利于提高发送上行信号的准确度。
在一种可能的实现中,所述第一TRP对应第一定时器,所述第二TRP对应第二定时器;
所述方法还包括:
当所述第一定时器未超时,且所述第二定时器超时时,所述终端设备执行以下操作中的至少一项操作:
所述终端设备清空所述第二TRP对应的混合自动重传请求HARQ进程的缓存;
所述终端设备释放所述第二TRP对应的PUCCH资源,和/或,上行参考信号对应的资源;
所述终端设备清空所述第二TRP对应的预配置的下行分配资源和上行授权资源;
所述终端设备清空所述第二TRP对应的用于半静态信道状态信息上报关联的PUSCH资源;
所述终端设备维持所述第二TA;
所述终端设备根据第一TA向所述网络设备发送指示信息,所述指示信息用于指示所述第二TA失效。
在该种实现方式下,当终端设备识别到部分TRP的TA失效/上行失步时,可通过TA有效/上行同步的TRP,立即向网络设备告知失步信息,便于网络及时将UE的上行恢复至同步状态,恢复mTRP传输状态,提升可靠性和传输容量。
在一种可能的实现中,所述终端设备根据第一TA向所述网络设备发送指示信息,包括:
当所述终端设备中待发送数据的数据量大于或者等于第一阈值时,所述终端设备根据所述第一TA向所述网络设备发送所述指示信息。
在该种实现方式下,终端设备也可以在发现第二TRP对应的第二TA失效时,不立即上报,而是等待终端设备中待发送数据的数据量超过第一阈值时,再根据第一TA发送指示信息以告知网络设备第二TRP对应的TA失效,通过该方式,能够在终端设备上行业务量较大时,及时通知网络设备终端设备的上行发生了失步的状况,网络设备后续可重新令终端获取第二TA信息。
在一种可能的实现中,所述第一TRP和所述第二TRP对应同一小区,或者,所述第一TRP和所述第二TRP对应不同的小区。也就是说,本申请中的方案可以适用于多种场景,例如Intra-cell mTRP场景(即第一TRP和第二TRP对应同一小区)和Inter-cell mTRP场景(即第一TRP和第二TRP对应不同的小区),适用性强。
在一种可能的实现中,所述第一TRP和所述第二TRP对应不同的小区,所述第一TRP对应源小区,所述第二TRP对应目标小区;
所述终端设备接收来自所述网络设备的指示所述第二TA的信息之后,所述方法还包括:
所述终端设备接收来自所述源小区的切换命令;
所述终端设备根据所述切换命令从所述源小区切换至所述目标小区,所述切换命令指示在所述目标小区使用所述第二TA。也就是说,本申请还可以扩展到移动性切换场景(即小区切换场景),进一步提升了方案的适用范围。
在一种可能的实现中,所述指示所述第二TA的信息包括以下任意一项:
所述第二TA的值、或所述第一TA的值与所述第二TA的值之间的差值信息。
在该种实现方式下,网络设备可以直接指示第二TA的值,或者,也可以指示差值信息。其中,当网络设备指示差值信息时,可以使用较少的比特完成指示,有利于节省信令开销。
在一种可能的实现中,所述指示所述第二TA的信息承载于随机接入响应消息,或者,所述指示所述第二TA的信息承载于媒体接入控制控制单元MAC CE。
在一种可能的实现中,所述用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息包括以下任意一项:
前导码、或SRS。
在一种可能的实现中,所述终端设备接收来自所述网络设备的指示所述第二TA的信息之后,所述方法还包括:
所述终端设备释放所述第一资源。
在该种实现方式下,终端设备释放所述第一资源,有利于网络设备及时回收资源,以便用于其他需要使用该第一资源的终端设备。
第二方面,本申请提供了一种通信方法,该方法适用于网络设备或网络设备中的芯片,以下以网络设备为方法的执行主体为例进行说明。该方法包括:
所述网络设备向终端设备发送第一传输接收点TRP对应的第一定时提前TA,所述第一TA用于所述终端设备与所述第一TRP通信;
所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送第一资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息;
所述网络设备接收所述终端设备响应于所述用于指示获取TA的信息,使用所述第一资源发送的用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息;
所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送指示所述第二TA的信息,所述第二TA用于所述终端设备与所述 第二TRP通信。
在一种可能的实现中,所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送第一资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息,包括:
所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送多传输接收点mTRP传输的配置消息,所述mTRP传输的配置消息包括第一资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息。
在一种可能的实现中,所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送第一资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息,包括:
所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送多传输接收点mTRP传输的配置消息,所述mTRP传输的配置消息包括所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系以及所述用于指示获取TA的信息,所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系包括所述第一资源的配置信息和所述第二TRP的标识信息。
在一种可能的实现中,所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送第一资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息,包括:
所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送第一消息,所述第一消息包括一个或者多个资源的配置信息,所述一个或者多个资源包括所述第一资源;
所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送第二消息,所述第二消息包括用于指示获取TA的信息。
在一种可能的实现中,所述第一消息为mTRP传输的配置消息,所述第二消息为物理下行控制信道命令PDCCH order。
在一种可能的实现中,所述第一消息还包括所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系,所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系包括所述第一资源的配置信息和第二TRP的标识信息。
在一种可能的实现中,所述第二消息还包括所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系,所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系包括所述第一资源的指示信息和所述第二TRP的标识信息。
在一种可能的实现中,所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送指示所述第二TA的信息,包括:
所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送所述第二TA和所述第二TRP的对应关系,所述第二TA和所述第二TRP的对应关系包括用于指示所述第二TA的信息和所述第二TRP的标识信息。
在一种可能的实现中,所述第一资源为以下任意一项:
波束、随机接入的资源、或探测参考信号SRS的资源。
在一种可能的实现中,所述方法还包括:
所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送调整命令,所述调整命令中包括所述第二TRP的标识信息和所述第二TRP对应的TA更新信息,所述TA更新信息用于更新所述第二TA。
在一种可能的实现中,所述mTRP传输的配置信息中还包括以下所述第二TRP对应的第二资源的配置信息中的至少一项:
物理下行控制信道PDCCH资源的配置信息,物理上行控制信道PUCCH资源的配置信息,用于半静态信道状态信息上报的物理上行共享信道PUSCH资源的配置信息,下行分配资源的配置信息,上行授权资源的配置信息,波束和/或波束集的配置信息,上行参考信号对应的资源的配置信息。
在一种可能的实现中,所述方法还包括:
所述网络设备使用所述第二资源向所述终端设备发送调整命令,所述调整命令中包括所述第二TRP对应的TA更新信息,所述TA更新信息用于更新所述第二TA。
在一种可能的实现中,所述方法还包括:
所述网络设备接收来自所述终端设备的指示信息,所述指示信息用于指示所述第二TA失效。
在一种可能的实现中,所述第一TRP和所述第二TRP对应同一小区,或者,所述第一TRP和所述第二TRP对应不同的小区。
在一种可能的实现中,所述指示所述第二TA的信息包括以下任意一项:
所述第二TA的值、或所述第一TA的值与所述第二TA的值之间的差值信息。
在一种可能的实现中,所述指示所述第二TA的信息承载于随机接入响应消息,或者,所述指示所述第二TA的信息承载于媒体接入控制控制单元MAC CE。
在一种可能的实现中,所述用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息包括以下任意一项:
前导码、或SRS。
需要说明的是,上述第二方面的有益效果可参见第一方面的有益效果,在此不再进行赘述。
第三方面,本申请提供了一种通信方法,该方法适用于终端设备或终端设备中的芯片,以下以终端设 备为方法的执行主体为例进行说明。该方法包括:
所述终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一TRP对应的第三资源的配置信息和第二TRP对应的第一资源的配置信息;
所述终端设备使用所述第三资源向所述第一TRP发送用于确定所述第一TRP的第一TA的信息,以及使用所述第一资源向所述第二TRP发送用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息;
所述终端设备接收来自所述网络设备的指示所述第一TA的信息和指示所述第二TA的信息。
在本申请中,终端设备可以同时获取多TRR中各个TRP对应的TA,因此,在后续通信中,终端设备能够以准确的上行发送时间,向不同的TRP发送信号。
在一种可能的实现中,所述终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一TRP对应的第三资源的配置信息和第二TRP对应的第一资源的配置信息,包括:
所述终端设备接收来自所述网络设备的切换命令,所述切换命令包括所述第一TRP对应的第三资源的配置信息和第二TRP对应的第一资源的配置信息。也就是说,本申请可以适用于小区切换场景。
在一种可能的实现中,所述切换命令还包括所述第三资源和所述第一TRP的对应关系,以及所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系;其中,所述第三资源和所述第一TRP的对应关系包括所述第三资源的配置信息和所述第一TRP的标识信息,所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系包括所述第一资源的配置信息和所述第二TRP的标识信息;
所述方法还包括:
所述终端设备根据所述第三资源和所述第一TRP的对应关系,确定所述第一TA对应于所述第一TRP;
所述终端设备根据所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系,确定所述第二TA对应于所述第二TRP。
在该种实现方式下,网络设备通过下发第三资源和所述第一TRP的对应关系,以及第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系,有利于后续终端设备根据第三资源和第一TRP的对应关系,确定后续接收到的第一TA对应于第一TRP,以及根据第一资源和第二TRP的对应关系,确定后续接收到的第二TA对应于第二TRP。
在一种可能的实现中,所述终端设备接收来自所述网络设备的指示所述第一TA的信息和指示所述第二TA的信息,包括:
所述终端设备接收来自所述网络设备的第三消息,所述第三消息包括指示所述第一TA的信息和指示所述第二TA的信息。
在该种实现方式下,网络设备通过一条消息同时携带指示第一TA的信息和指示第二TA的信息,有利于节省信令开销。
在一种可能的实现中,所述第三消息中还包括所述第一TA与第一TRP的对应关系,以及所述第二TA与第二TRP的对应关系;其中,所述第一TA与第一TRP的对应关系包括用于指示所述第一TA的信息和所述第一TRP的标识信息,所述第二TA和所述第二TRP的对应关系包括用于指示所述第二TA的信息和所述第二TRP的标识信息;
所述方法还包括:
所述终端设备根据所述第一TA和所述第一TRP的对应关系,确定所述第一TA对应于所述第一TRP;
所述终端设备根据所述第二TA和所述第二TRP的对应关系,确定所述第二TA对应于所述第二TRP。
在该种实现方式下,通过第三消息中携带第三资源和所述第一TRP的对应关系,以及第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系,有利于后续终端设备根据第三资源和第一TRP的对应关系,确定后续接收到的第一TA对应于第一TRP,以及根据第一资源和第二TRP的对应关系,确定后续接收到的第二TA对应于第二TRP。
在一种可能的实现中,所述终端设备接收来自所述网络设备的指示所述第一TA的信息和指示所述第二TA的信息,包括:
所述终端设备接收来自所述网络设备的第四消息,所述第四消息包括指示所述第一TA的信息;
所述终端设备接收来自所述网络设备的第五消息,所述第五消息包括指示所述第二TA的信息。
在该种实现方式下,网络设备可以通过两条消息下发指示第一TA的信息和指示第二TA的信息,例如第四消息承载指示第一TA的信息,第五消息承载指示第二TA的信息,这样有利于提高TA下发的效率,特别是如果两个TRP是在两个网络设备上,那么通过两条消息下发的话,不需要第一TRP和第二TRP的网络设备进行交互,可以两个设备直接发给终端设备,处理时间更快,且节省网络设备交互的过程。
在一种可能的实现中,所述第四消息中还包括所述第一TA与第一TRP的对应关系,其中所述第一TA 与第一TRP的对应关系包括用于指示所述第一TA的信息和所述第一TRP的标识信息;所述第五消息中还包括所述第二TA与第二TRP的对应关系,其中所述第二TA与第二TRP的对应关系包括用于指示所述第二TA的信息和所述第二TRP的标识信息;
所述方法还包括:
所述终端设备根据所述第一TA和所述第一TRP的对应关系,确定所述第一TA对应于所述第一TRP;
所述终端设备根据所述第二TA和所述第二TRP的对应关系,确定所述第二TA对应于所述第二TRP。
在该种实现方式下,在该种实现方式下,通过第四消息中携带第三资源和所述第一TRP的对应关系,通过第五消息中携带第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系,有利于后续终端设备根据第三资源和第一TRP的对应关系,确定后续接收到的第一TA对应于第一TRP,以及根据第一资源和第二TRP的对应关系,确定后续接收到的第二TA对应于第二TRP。
在一种可能的实现中,所述第一资源或所述第三资源为以下任意一项:
波束、随机接入的资源、或探测参考信号SRS的资源。
第四方面,本申请提供了一种通信方法,该方法适用于网络设备或网络设备中的芯片,以下以网络设备为方法的执行主体为例进行说明。该方法包括:
所述网络设备向终端设备发送第一TRP对应的第三资源的配置信息和第二TRP对应的第一资源的配置信息;
所述网络设备通过所述第一TRP接收来自所述终端设备的用于确定所述第一TRP的第一TA的信息,以及通过所述第二TRP接收来自所述终端设备的用于确定所述第二TRP的第二TA的信息;
所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送指示所述第一TA的信息和指示所述第二TA的信息。
在一种可能的实现中,所述网络设备向终端设备发送第一TRP对应的第三资源的配置信息和第二TRP对应的第一资源的配置信息,包括:
所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送切换命令,所述切换命令包括所述第一TRP对应的第三资源的配置信息和第二TRP对应的第一资源的配置信息。
在一种可能的实现中,所述切换命令还包括所述第三资源和所述第一TRP的对应关系,以及所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系;其中,所述第三资源和所述第一TRP的对应关系包括所述第三资源的配置信息和所述第一TRP的标识信息,所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系包括所述第一资源的配置信息和所述第二TRP的标识信息。
在一种可能的实现中,所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送指示所述第一TA的信息和指示所述第二TA的信息,包括:
所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送第三消息,所述第三消息包括指示所述第一TA的信息和指示所述第二TA的信息。
在一种可能的实现中,所述第三消息中还包括所述第一TA与第一TRP的对应关系,以及所述第二TA与第二TRP的对应关系;其中,所述第一TA与第一TRP的对应关系包括用于指示所述第一TA的信息和所述第一TRP的标识信息,所述第二TA和所述第二TRP的对应关系包括用于指示所述第二TA的信息和所述第二TRP的标识信息。
在一种可能的实现中,所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送指示所述第一TA的信息和指示所述第二TA的信息,包括:
所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送第四消息,所述第四消息包括指示所述第一TA的信息;
所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送第五消息,所述第五消息包括指示所述第二TA的信息。
在一种可能的实现中,所述第四消息中还包括所述第一TA与第一TRP的对应关系,其中所述第一TA与第一TRP的对应关系包括用于指示所述第一TA的信息和所述第一TRP的标识信息;所述第五消息中还包括所述第二TA与第二TRP的对应关系,其中所述第二TA与第二TRP的对应关系包括用于指示所述第二TA的信息和所述第二TRP的标识信息。
在一种可能的实现中,所述第一资源或所述第三资源为以下任意一项:
波束、随机接入的资源、或探测参考信号SRS的资源。
需要说明的是,上述第四方面的有益效果可参见第三方面的有益效果,在此不再进行赘述。
第五方面,本申请提供了一种通信方法,该方法适用于终端设备或终端设备中的芯片,以下以终端设备为方法的执行主体为例进行说明,该终端设备已获取与第一传输接收点TRP通信的第一定时提前TA。该方法包括:
所述终端设备接收来自网络设备的多传输接收点mTRP传输的配置消息,所述mTRP传输的配置消息包括指示第二TA的信息,所述第二TA为第二TRP对应的TA,所述指示所述第二TA的信息包括以下任意一项:所述第二TA的值、或所述第一TA的值与所述第二TA的值之间的差值信息;
所述终端设备使用所述第二TA与所述第二TRP通信。
在本申请中,当终端设备已获取与第一TRP通信的第一TA(即终端设备已进行单TRP传输)时,若网络设备确定该终端设备适合mTRP传输,则网络设备可以指示该终端设备进行mTRP传输,并直接指示终端设备第二TA的信息。因此,当终端设备获取到第二TA之后,在后续通信中,终端设备能够以准确的上行发送时间,向不同的TRP发送信号。
在一种可能的实现中,所述mTRP传输的配置消息包括指示第二TA的信息,包括:
所述mTRP传输的配置消息包括所述第二TRP的标识信息和所述指示第二TA的信息。
第六方面,本申请提供了一种通信方法,该方法适用于网络设备或网络设备中的芯片,以下以网络设备为方法的执行主体为例进行说明。该方法包括:
所述网络设备向终端设备发送第一传输接收点TRP对应的第一定时提前TA,所述第一TA用于所述终端设备与所述第一TRP通信;
所述网络设备向终端设备发送多传输接收点mTRP传输的配置消息,所述mTRP传输的配置消息包括指示第二TA的信息,所述第二TA为第二TRP对应的TA,所述指示所述第二TA的信息包括以下任意一项:所述第二TA的值、或所述第一TA的值与所述第二TA的值之间的差值信息,所述第二TA用于所述终端设备与所述第二TRP通信。
在一种可能的实现中,所述mTRP传输的配置消息包括指示第二TA的信息,包括:
所述mTRP传输的配置消息包括所述第二TRP的标识信息和所述指示第二TA的信息。
需要说明的是,上述第六方面的有益效果可参见第五方面的有益效果,在此不再进行赘述。
第七方面,本申请提供了一种通信装置,该装置为终端设备,该终端设备已获取与第一传输接收点TRP通信的第一定时提前TA,该装置包括:
收发单元,用于获取来自网络设备的第一资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息;
处理单元,用于根据所述用于指示获取TA的信息,通过所述收发单元使用所述第一资源向所述网络设备发送用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息;
所述收发单元,用于接收来自所述网络设备的指示所述第二TA的信息,所述第二TA用于所述终端设备与所述第二TRP通信。
在一种可能的实现中,在获取来自网络设备的第一资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息时,所述收发单元用于:
获取来自所述网络设备的多传输接收点mTRP传输的配置消息,所述mTRP传输的配置消息包括所述第一资源的配置信息和所述用于指示获取TA的信息。
在一种可能的实现中,在获取来自网络设备的第一资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息时,所述收发单元用于:
获取来自所述网络设备的多传输接收点mTRP传输的配置消息,所述mTRP传输的配置消息包括所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系以及所述用于指示获取TA的信息,所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系包括所述第一资源的配置信息和所述第二TRP的标识信息;
所述处理单元还用于:
根据所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系,确定所述第二TA对应于所述第二TRP。
在一种可能的实现中,在获取来自网络设备的第一资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息时,所述收发单元用于:
接收来自所述网络设备的第一消息,所述第一消息包括一个或者多个资源的配置信息,所述一个或者多个资源包括所述第一资源;
接收来自所述网络设备的第二消息,所述第二消息包括用于指示获取TA的信息。
在一种可能的实现中,所述第一消息为mTRP传输的配置消息,所述第二消息为物理下行控制信道命令PDCCH order。
在一种可能的实现中,所述第一消息还包括所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系,所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系包括所述第一资源的配置信息和第二TRP的标识信息;
所述处理单元还用于:
根据所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系,确定所述第二TA对应于所述第二TRP。
在一种可能的实现中,所述第二消息还包括所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系,所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系包括所述第一资源的指示信息和所述第二TRP的标识信息;
所述处理单元还用于:
根据所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系,确定所述第二TA对应于所述第二TRP。
在一种可能的实现中,在接收来自所述网络设备的用于指示所述第二TA的信息时,所述收发单元用于:
接收来自所述网络设备的所述第二TA和所述第二TRP的对应关系,所述第二TA和所述第二TRP的对应关系包括用于指示所述第二TA的信息和所述第二TRP的标识信息;
所述处理单元还用于:
根据所述第二TA和所述第二TRP的对应关系,确定所述第二TA对应于所述第二TRP。
在一种可能的实现中,所述第一资源为以下任意一项:
波束、随机接入的资源、或探测参考信号SRS的资源。
在一种可能的实现中,所述收发单元还用于:
接收来自所述网络设备的调整命令,所述调整命令中包括所述第二TRP的标识信息和所述第二TRP对应的TA更新信息,所述TA更新信息用于更新所述第二TA。
在一种可能的实现中,所述mTRP传输的配置信息中还包括以下所述第二TRP对应的第二资源的配置信息中的至少一项:
物理下行控制信道PDCCH资源的配置信息,物理上行控制信道PUCCH资源的配置信息,用于半静态信道状态信息上报的物理上行共享信道PUSCH资源的配置信息,下行分配资源的配置信息,上行授权资源的配置信息,波束和/或波束集的配置信息,上行参考信号对应的资源的配置信息。
在一种可能的实现中,所述收发单元,还用于使用所述第二资源接收来自所述网络设备的调整命令,所述调整命令中包括所述第二TRP对应的TA更新信息,所述TA更新信息用于更新所述第二TA;
所述处理单元,还用于根据所述第二资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系,确定所述调整命令对应于所述第二TRP,所述第二资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系包括所述第二资源的配置信息和所述第二TRP的标识信息。
在一种可能的实现中,所述第一TRP对应第一定时器,所述第二TRP对应第二定时器;
当所述第一定时器未超时,且所述第二定时器超时时,所述处理单元执行以下操作中的至少一项操作:
清空所述第二TRP对应的混合自动重传请求HARQ进程的缓存;
释放所述第二TRP对应的PUCCH资源,和/或,上行参考信号对应的资源;
清空所述第二TRP对应的预配置的下行分配资源和上行授权资源;
清空所述第二TRP对应的用于半静态信道状态信息上报关联的PUSCH资源;
维持所述第二TA;
根据第一TA通过所述收发单元向所述网络设备发送指示信息,所述指示信息用于指示所述第二TA失效。
在一种可能的实现中,在根据第一TA向所述网络设备发送指示信息时,所述处理单元用于:
当所述终端设备中待发送数据的数据量大于或者等于第一阈值时,通过所述收发单元根据所述第一TA向所述网络设备发送所述指示信息。
在一种可能的实现中,所述第一TRP和所述第二TRP对应同一小区,或者,所述第一TRP和所述第二TRP对应不同的小区。
在一种可能的实现中,所述第一TRP和所述第二TRP对应不同的小区,所述第一TRP对应源小区,所述第二TRP对应目标小区;
所述接收来自所述网络设备的指示所述第二TA的信息之后,所述收发单元还用于:
接收来自所述源小区的切换命令;
根据所述切换命令从所述源小区切换至所述目标小区,所述切换命令指示在所述目标小区使用所述第二TA。
在一种可能的实现中,所述指示所述第二TA的信息包括以下任意一项:
所述第二TA的值、或所述第一TA的值与所述第二TA的值之间的差值信息。
在一种可能的实现中,所述指示所述第二TA的信息承载于随机接入响应消息,或者,所述指示所述 第二TA的信息承载于媒体接入控制控制单元MAC CE。
在一种可能的实现中,所述用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息包括以下任意一项:
前导码、或SRS。
在一种可能的实现中,所述接收来自所述网络设备的指示所述第二TA的信息之后,所述处理单元还用于:
释放所述第一资源。
第八方面,本申请提供了一种通信装置,该装置为网络设备,该装置包括:
收发单元,用于向终端设备发送第一传输接收点TRP对应的第一定时提前TA,所述第一TA用于所述终端设备与所述第一TRP通信;
所述收发单元,用于向所述终端设备发送第一资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息;
所述收发单元,用于接收所述终端设备响应于所述用于指示获取TA的信息,使用所述第一资源发送的用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息;
所述收发单元,用于向所述终端设备发送指示所述第二TA的信息,所述第二TA用于所述终端设备与所述第二TRP通信。
在一种可能的实现中,在向所述终端设备发送第一资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息,所述收发单元用于:
向所述终端设备发送多传输接收点mTRP传输的配置消息,所述mTRP传输的配置消息包括第一资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息。
在一种可能的实现中,在向所述终端设备发送第一资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息时,所述收发单元用于:
向所述终端设备发送多传输接收点mTRP传输的配置消息,所述mTRP传输的配置消息包括所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系以及所述用于指示获取TA的信息,所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系包括所述第一资源的配置信息和所述第二TRP的标识信息。
在一种可能的实现中,在向所述终端设备发送第一资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息,所述收发单元用于:
向所述终端设备发送第一消息,所述第一消息包括一个或者多个资源的配置信息,所述一个或者多个资源包括所述第一资源;
向所述终端设备发送第二消息,所述第二消息包括用于指示获取TA的信息。
在一种可能的实现中,所述第一消息为mTRP传输的配置消息,所述第二消息为物理下行控制信道命令PDCCH order。
在一种可能的实现中,所述第一消息还包括所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系,所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系包括所述第一资源的配置信息和第二TRP的标识信息。
在一种可能的实现中,所述第二消息还包括所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系,所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系包括所述第一资源的指示信息和所述第二TRP的标识信息。
在一种可能的实现中,在向所述终端设备发送指示所述第二TA的信息时,所述收发单元用于:
向所述终端设备发送所述第二TA和所述第二TRP的对应关系,所述第二TA和所述第二TRP的对应关系包括用于指示所述第二TA的信息和所述第二TRP的标识信息。
在一种可能的实现中,所述第一资源为以下任意一项:
波束、随机接入的资源、或探测参考信号SRS的资源。
在一种可能的实现中,所述收发单元还用于:
向所述终端设备发送调整命令,所述调整命令中包括所述第二TRP的标识信息和所述第二TRP对应的TA更新信息,所述TA更新信息用于更新所述第二TA。
在一种可能的实现中,所述mTRP传输的配置信息中还包括以下所述第二TRP对应的第二资源的配置信息中的至少一项:
物理下行控制信道PDCCH资源的配置信息,物理上行控制信道PUCCH资源的配置信息,用于半静态信道状态信息上报的物理上行共享信道PUSCH资源的配置信息,下行分配资源的配置信息,上行授权资源的配置信息,波束和/或波束集的配置信息,上行参考信号对应的资源的配置信息。
在一种可能的实现中,所述收发单元还用于:
使用所述第二资源向所述终端设备发送调整命令,所述调整命令中包括所述第二TRP对应的TA更新 信息,所述TA更新信息用于更新所述第二TA。
在一种可能的实现中,所述收发单元还用于:
接收来自所述终端设备的指示信息,所述指示信息用于指示所述第二TA失效。
在一种可能的实现中,所述第一TRP和所述第二TRP对应同一小区,或者,所述第一TRP和所述第二TRP对应不同的小区。
在一种可能的实现中,所述指示所述第二TA的信息包括以下任意一项:
所述第二TA的值、或所述第一TA的值与所述第二TA的值之间的差值信息。
在一种可能的实现中,所述指示所述第二TA的信息承载于随机接入响应消息,或者,所述指示所述第二TA的信息承载于媒体接入控制控制单元MAC CE。
在一种可能的实现中,所述用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息包括以下任意一项:
前导码、或SRS。
第九方面,本申请提供了一种通信装置,该装置为终端设备,该装置包括:
收发单元,用于接收来自网络设备的第一TRP对应的第三资源的配置信息和第二TRP对应的第一资源的配置信息;
所述收发单元,用于使用所述第三资源向所述第一TRP发送用于确定所述第一TRP的第一TA的信息,以及使用所述第一资源向所述第二TRP发送用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息;
所述收发单元,用于接收来自所述网络设备的指示所述第一TA的信息和指示所述第二TA的信息。
在一种可能的实现中,在接收来自网络设备的第一TRP对应的第三资源的配置信息和第二TRP对应的第一资源的配置信息时,所述收发单元用于:
接收来自所述网络设备的切换命令,所述切换命令包括所述第一TRP对应的第三资源的配置信息和第二TRP对应的第一资源的配置信息。
在一种可能的实现中,所述切换命令还包括所述第三资源和所述第一TRP的对应关系,以及所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系;其中,所述第三资源和所述第一TRP的对应关系包括所述第三资源的配置信息和所述第一TRP的标识信息,所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系包括所述第一资源的配置信息和所述第二TRP的标识信息;
所述装置还包括处理单元,所述处理单元用于:
根据所述第三资源和所述第一TRP的对应关系,确定所述第一TA对应于所述第一TRP;
根据所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系,确定所述第二TA对应于所述第二TRP。
在一种可能的实现中,在接收来自所述网络设备的指示所述第一TA的信息和指示所述第二TA的信息时,所述收发单元用于:
接收来自所述网络设备的第三消息,所述第三消息包括指示所述第一TA的信息和指示所述第二TA的信息。
在一种可能的实现中,所述第三消息中还包括所述第一TA与第一TRP的对应关系,以及所述第二TA与第二TRP的对应关系;其中,所述第一TA与第一TRP的对应关系包括用于指示所述第一TA的信息和所述第一TRP的标识信息,所述第二TA和所述第二TRP的对应关系包括用于指示所述第二TA的信息和所述第二TRP的标识信息;
所述装置还包括处理单元,所述处理单元用于:
根据所述第一TA和所述第一TRP的对应关系,确定所述第一TA对应于所述第一TRP;
根据所述第二TA和所述第二TRP的对应关系,确定所述第二TA对应于所述第二TRP。
在一种可能的实现中,在接收来自所述网络设备的指示所述第一TA的信息和指示所述第二TA的信息时,所述处理单元用于:
接收来自所述网络设备的第四消息,所述第四消息包括指示所述第一TA的信息;
接收来自所述网络设备的第五消息,所述第五消息包括指示所述第二TA的信息。
在一种可能的实现中,所述第四消息中还包括所述第一TA与第一TRP的对应关系,其中所述第一TA与第一TRP的对应关系包括用于指示所述第一TA的信息和所述第一TRP的标识信息;所述第五消息中还包括所述第二TA与第二TRP的对应关系,其中所述第二TA与第二TRP的对应关系包括用于指示所述第二TA的信息和所述第二TRP的标识信息;
所述装置还包括处理单元,所述处理单元用于:
根据所述第一TA和所述第一TRP的对应关系,确定所述第一TA对应于所述第一TRP;
根据所述第二TA和所述第二TRP的对应关系,确定所述第二TA对应于所述第二TRP。
在一种可能的实现中,所述第一资源或所述第三资源为以下任意一项:
波束、随机接入的资源、或探测参考信号SRS的资源。
第十方面,本申请提供了一种通信装置,该装置为网络设备,该装置包括:
收发单元,用于向终端设备发送第一TRP对应的第三资源的配置信息和第二TRP对应的第一资源的配置信息;
所述收发单元,用于通过所述第一TRP接收来自所述终端设备的用于确定所述第一TRP的第一TA的信息,以及通过所述第二TRP接收来自所述终端设备的用于确定所述第二TRP的第二TA的信息;
所述收发单元,用于向所述终端设备发送指示所述第一TA的信息和指示所述第二TA的信息。
在一种可能的实现中,在向终端设备发送第一TRP对应的第三资源的配置信息和第二TRP对应的第一资源的配置信息,所述收发单元用于:
向所述终端设备发送切换命令,所述切换命令包括所述第一TRP对应的第三资源的配置信息和第二TRP对应的第一资源的配置信息。
在一种可能的实现中,所述切换命令还包括所述第三资源和所述第一TRP的对应关系,以及所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系;其中,所述第三资源和所述第一TRP的对应关系包括所述第三资源的配置信息和所述第一TRP的标识信息,所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系包括所述第一资源的配置信息和所述第二TRP的标识信息。
在一种可能的实现中,在向所述终端设备发送指示所述第一TA的信息和指示所述第二TA的信息时,所述收发单元用于:
向所述终端设备发送第三消息,所述第三消息包括指示所述第一TA的信息和指示所述第二TA的信息。
在一种可能的实现中,所述第三消息中还包括所述第一TA与第一TRP的对应关系,以及所述第二TA与第二TRP的对应关系;其中,所述第一TA与第一TRP的对应关系包括用于指示所述第一TA的信息和所述第一TRP的标识信息,所述第二TA和所述第二TRP的对应关系包括用于指示所述第二TA的信息和所述第二TRP的标识信息。
在一种可能的实现中,在向所述终端设备发送指示所述第一TA的信息和指示所述第二TA的信息时,所述收发单元用于:
向所述终端设备发送第四消息,所述第四消息包括指示所述第一TA的信息;
向所述终端设备发送第五消息,所述第五消息包括指示所述第二TA的信息。
在一种可能的实现中,所述第四消息中还包括所述第一TA与第一TRP的对应关系,其中所述第一TA与第一TRP的对应关系包括用于指示所述第一TA的信息和所述第一TRP的标识信息;所述第五消息中还包括所述第二TA与第二TRP的对应关系,其中所述第二TA与第二TRP的对应关系包括用于指示所述第二TA的信息和所述第二TRP的标识信息。
在一种可能的实现中,所述第一资源或所述第三资源为以下任意一项:
波束、随机接入的资源、或探测参考信号SRS的资源。
第十一方面,本申请提供了一种通信装置,该装置为终端设备,所述终端已获取与第一传输接收点TRP通信的第一定时提前TA,该装置包括:
收发单元,用于接收来自网络设备的多传输接收点mTRP传输的配置消息,所述mTRP传输的配置消息包括指示第二TA的信息,所述第二TA为第二TRP对应的TA,所述指示所述第二TA的信息包括以下任意一项:所述第二TA的值、或所述第一TA的值与所述第二TA的值之间的差值信息;
处理单元,用于使用所述第二TA与所述第二TRP通信。
在一种可能的实现中,所述mTRP传输的配置消息包括指示第二TA的信息,包括:
所述mTRP传输的配置消息包括所述第二TRP的标识信息和所述指示第二TA的信息。
第十二方面,本申请提供了一种通信装置,该装置为网络设备,该装置包括:
收发单元,用于向终端设备发送第一传输接收点TRP对应的第一定时提前TA,所述第一TA用于所述终端设备与所述第一TRP通信;
所述收发单元,用于向终端设备发送多传输接收点mTRP传输的配置消息,所述mTRP传输的配置消息包括指示第二TA的信息,所述第二TA为第二TRP对应的TA,所述指示所述第二TA的信息包括以下任意一项:所述第二TA的值、或所述第一TA的值与所述第二TA的值之间的差值信息,所述第二TA用 于所述终端设备与所述第二TRP通信。
在一种可能的实现中,所述mTRP传输的配置消息包括指示第二TA的信息,包括:
所述mTRP传输的配置消息包括所述第二TRP的标识信息和所述指示第二TA的信息。
第十三方面,本申请提供了一种通信装置,该装置可以是终端设备,也可以是终端设备中的装置,或者是能够和终端设备匹配使用的装置。其中,该通信装置还可以为芯片系统。该通信装置可执行第一方面或第三方面或第五方面所述的方法。该通信装置的功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。该硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的单元或模块。该单元或模块可以是软件和/或硬件。该通信装置执行的操作及有益效果可以参见上述第一方面或第三方面或第五方面所述的方法以及有益效果,重复之处不再赘述。
第十四方面,本申请提供了一种通信装置,该装置可以是网络设备,也可以是网络设备中的装置,或者是能够和网络设备匹配使用的装置。其中,该通信装置还可以为芯片系统。该通信装置可执行第二方面或第四方面或第六方面所述的方法。该通信装置的功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。该硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的单元或模块。该单元或模块可以是软件和/或硬件。该通信装置执行的操作及有益效果可以参见上述第二方面或第四方面或第六方面所述的方法以及有益效果,重复之处不再赘述。
第十五方面,本申请提供了一种通信装置,该装置可以是终端设备,所述通信装置包括处理器和收发器,所述处理器和所述收发器用于执行至少一个存储器中存储的计算机程序或指令,以使得所述装置实现如第一方面或第三方面或第五方面中任意一项的方法。
第十六方面,本申请提供了一种通信装置,该装置可以是终端设备,该通信装置包括处理器、收发器和存储器。其中,处理器、收发器和存储器耦合;处理器和收发器用于实现如第一方面或第三方面或第五方面和/或第二方面或第四方面或第六方面中任意一项的方法。
第十七方面,本申请提供了一种通信装置,该装置可以是网络设备,所述通信装置包括处理器和收发器,所述处理器和所述收发器用于执行至少一个存储器中存储的计算机程序或指令,以使得所述装置实现如第二方面或第四方面或第六方面中任意一项的方法。
第十八方面,本申请提供了一种通信装置,该装置可以是网络设备,该通信装置包括处理器、收发器和存储器。其中,处理器、收发器和存储器耦合;处理器和收发器用于实现如第二方面或第四方面或第六方面和/或第二方面或第四方面或第六方面中任意一项的方法。
第十九方面,本申请提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,存储介质中存储有计算机程序或指令,当计算机程序或指令被计算机执行时,实现如第一方面或第三方面或第五方面中任意一项的方法。
第二十方面,本申请提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,存储介质中存储有计算机程序或指令,当计算机程序或指令被计算机执行时,实现如第二方面或第四方面或第六方面中任意一项的方法。
第二十一方面,本申请提供一种包括指令的计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品中包括计算机程序代码,当计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时,以实现第一方面或第三方面或第五方面中任意一项的方法。
第二十二方面,本申请提供一种包括指令的计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品中包括计算机程序代码,当计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时,以实现第二方面或第四方面或第六方面中任意一项的方法。
第二十三方面,提供一种通信系统,该通信系统包括上述第七方面或第九方面或第十一方面所述的终端设备,和,第八方面或第十方面或第十二方面所述的网络设备。
附图说明
图1是本申请实施例提供的通信系统的结构示意图;
图2为本申请实施例提供的mTRP传输的示意图;
图3为基于非竞争的随机接入过程获取初始TA的流程示意图;
图4是本申请实施例提供的Intra-cell mTRP传输场景的示意图;
图5是本申请实施例提供的Inter-cell mTRP传输场景的示意图;
图6是本申请实施例提供的通信方法的一流程示意图;
图7是本申请实施例提供的通信方法的另一流程示意图;
图8是本申请实施例提供的通信方法的另一流程示意图;
图9是本申请实施例提供的通信方法的另一流程示意图;
图10是本申请实施例提供的通信方法的另一流程示意图;
图11是本申请实施例提供的通信方法的另一流程示意图;
图12是本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图;
图13是本申请实施例提供的另一种通信装置的结构示意图;
图14是本申请实施例提供的另一种通信装置的结构示意图;
图15是本申请实施例提供的另一种通信装置的结构示意图。
具体实施方式
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图,对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行清楚、完整地描述。
在本申请的描述中,除非另有说明,“/”表示“或”的意思,例如,A/B可以表示A或B。本文中的“和/或”仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。此外,“至少一个”是指一个或多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“第一”、“第二”等字样并不对数量和执行次序进行限定,并且“第一”、“第二”等字样也并不限定一定不同。
本申请中,“示例性的”或者“例如”等词用于表示作例子、例证或说明。本申请中被描述为“示例性的”或者“例如”的任何实施例或设计方案不应被解释为比其他实施例或设计方案更优选或更具优势。确切而言,使用“示例性的”或者“例如”等词旨在以具体方式呈现相关概念。
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统,例如:长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex,FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(time division duplex,TDD)、新无线(new radio,NR)等第五代(5th generation,5G)系统、第六代(6th generation,6G)系统等5G之后演进的系统、无线局域网(Wireless Local Area Network,WALN)等,在此不做限制。
示例性地,请参见图1,图1是本申请实施例提供的通信系统的结构示意图。如图1所示,接入网设备和终端设备1~终端设备6组成一个通信系统。在该通信系统中,终端设备1~终端设备6可以发送上行信息给接入网设备,接入网设备也可以发送下行信息给终端设备1~终端设备6。此外,终端设备4~终端设备6也可以组成一个通信系统。在该通信系统中,接入网设备可以发送下行信息给终端设备1、终端设备2、终端设备5等;终端设备5也可以发送下行信息给终端设备4、终端设备6。而终端设备4和终端设备6也可以通过终端设备5向接入网设备发送上行信息。
其中,本申请实施例中的终端设备,可以是一种具有无线收发功能的设备,具体可以指用户设备(user equipment,UE)、接入终端、用户单元(subscriber unit)、用户站、移动台(mobile station)、客户终端设备(customer-premises equipment,CPE)、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。终端设备还可以是卫星电话、蜂窝电话、智能手机、无线数据卡、无线调制解调器、机器类型通信设备、可以是无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字处理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、高空飞机上搭载的通信设备、可穿戴设备、无人机、机器人、智能销售点(point of sale,POS)机、设备到设备通信(device-to-device,D2D)中的终端、车到一切(vehicle to everything,V2X)中的终端、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)终端设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)终端设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程医疗(remote medical)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端或者未来通信网络中的终端设备等,本申请不作限制。
本申请实施例中,用于实现终端设备的功能的装置可以是终端设备;也可以是能够支持终端设备实现该功能的装置,例如芯片系统。该装置可以被安装在终端设备中或者和终端设备匹配使用。本申请实施例中,芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包括芯片和其他分立器件。
本申请实施例中的接入网设备,可以是具有无线收发功能的设备,用于与终端设备进行通信,也可以是一种将终端设备接入到无线网络的设备。接入网设备可以为无线接入网中的节点,又可以称为基站,还可以称为无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)节点(或设备)。接入网设备可以是LTE中的演进型基站(evolved Node B,eNB或eNodeB);或者5G网络中的下一代节点B(next generation node B,gNB)或者未来演进的公共陆地移动网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)中的基站,宽带网络业务网关(broadband network gateway,BNG),汇聚交换机或者非第三代合作伙伴项目(3rd generation partnership project,3GPP)接入设备等。可选的,本申请实施例中的接入网设备可以包括各种形式的基站,例如:宏基站、微基站(也 称为小站)、中继站、接入点、5G之后演进的通信系统中实现基站功能的设备、WiFi系统中的接入点(access point,AP)、传输点(transmitting and receiving point,TRP)、发射点(transmitting point,TP)、移动交换中心以及设备到设备(Device-to-Device,D2D)、车辆外联(vehicle-to-everything,V2X)、机器到机器(machine-to-machine,M2M)通信中承担基站功能的设备等,还可以包括云接入网(cloud radio access network,C-RAN)系统中的集中式单元(centralized unit,CU)和分布式单元(distributed unit,DU)、非陆地通信网络(non-terrestrial network,NTN)通信系统中的接入网设备,即可以部署于高空平台或者卫星。本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。
接入网设备可以和核心网设备进行通信交互,向终端设备提供通信服务。核心网设备例如为5G网络核心网(core network,CN)中的设备。核心网作为承载网络提供到数据网络的接口,为终端提供通信连接、认证、管理、策略控制以及对数据业务完成承载等。
本申请实施例中,用于实现接入网设备的功能的装置可以是接入网设备;也可以是能够支持接入网设备实现该功能的装置,例如芯片系统。该装置可以被安装在接入网设备中或者和接入网设备匹配使用。
可理解的,以下本申请实施例中的接入网设备也可以描述为网络设备,在此不做限制。
为便于理解本申请实施例的相关内容,下面对一些本申请方案需要用到的知识进行介绍。需要说明的是,这些解释是为了让本申请实施例更容易被理解,而不应该视为对本申请所要求的保护范围的限定。
1、多个传输接收点(multiple transmission reception point,mTRP)传输
mTRP传输是指由多个TRP为UE提供通信服务,多个TRP为物理位置上分离的多个天线或者同一天线上的多个天线阵列,组成multiple TRPs(即mTRP),形成不同的空间信道,并通过空间信道的不相关性,形成最大波束赋形增益或空间分集可靠性增益,以增强覆盖或可靠性。示例性,请参见图2,图2为本申请实施例提供的mTRP传输的示意图。如图2所示,以TRP#1和TRP#2为例,其中TRP#1和TRP#2可以与UE进行通信。
2、定时提前(timing advance,TA)
TA指的是UE向网络设备发送上行信号的定时提前量,UE根据TA值确定发送上行信号的时刻。在一个网络设备服务的小区中,存在多个UE,例如UE1和UE2,若UE1和UE2在相同的时刻发送上行信号,由于UE1和UE2距离网络设备的距离不同,UE1和UE2发送的上行信号到达网络设备的时间存在差异,可能造成用户间的信号干扰,使得网络设备无法正确解码两个用户的信号。因此,UE1和UE2需要根据各自的TA确定发送上行信号的时间,使得信号到达网络设备的时间接近,降低信号干扰。
3、TA管理
TA管理包括:(1)初始TA获取;(2)TA更新调整;(3)TA失效后的行为处理。
具体地,(1)初始TA获取
UE通过随机接入过程获取初始TA。例如,以如图3所示的非竞争的随机接入过程举例,说明UE获得初始TA的过程。如图3所示:
S301、网络设备向终端设备发送消息0(Msg0)。
其中,消息0包含随机接入资源的配置,该随机接入资源的配置可以包括前导码等。
S302、终端设备向网络设备发送消息1(Msg1)。
该消息1中包括网络设备分配的前导码,即终端设备使用网络设备分配的前导码发起随机接入。
S303、网络设备向终端设备发送消息2(Msg2)。
该消息2也可称为随机接入响应(random access response,RAR)消息。其中消息2中包括网络设备计算出来的TA的值。
可理解的,本申请实施例中涉及的网络设备为接入网设备,例如具体可以为gNB。其中,通过随机接入过程,UE获得与该gNB通信的初始TA,在后续的上行信号发送时,使用该TA确定发送时刻。
(2)TA更新调整
当gNB识别到UE发送的上行信号到达gNB的时刻与期望的存在偏差时(例如UE位置移动后,之前使用的TA不准确),gNB可以发送TA调整命令,例如TA调整命令可以为媒体接入控制控制单元(media access control control element,MAC CE),UE接收到该MAC CE后,可以更新TA。
(3)TA失效后的行为处理
由于TA值是在某个特定时刻计算出来的,在一段时间之后,此前计算的TA可能不再准确,故UE和/或gNB可以通过维护一个定时器,来判断此前收到的TA在当前是否仍有效。示例性地,UE在收到初始TA 时,可以启动/重启上述定时器;UE在收到TA调整命令后,可以重启上述定时器。当上述定时器超时后,认为TA已失效。
当UE判断TA已失效后,可以释放一些配置的上行传输相关的资源,例如探测参考信号(sounding reference signal,SRS),物理上行控制信道(physical uplink control channel,PUCCH),配置授权(configured grant,CG)等。进一步地,当UE有上行数据待传输,且判断TA已失效时,则UE触发随机接入过程。当gNB有下行数据待传输,且判断TA已失效时,gNB向UE发送消息触发UE进行随机接入过程。UE通过接下来的随机接入过程重新获取TA。
需要说明的是,上述TA管理可以适用于单TRP传输的过程,或者,上述TA管理也可以适用于mTRP传输场景下,多个TRP对应一个公共的TA的过程,即UE根据一个公共的TA向mTRP发送上行信号。但是mTRP传输场景下,根据公共的TA确定发送上行信号的时刻的方式,使得上行信号发送的准确度低。
基于此,本申请提供了一种通信方法及通信装置,可提高mTRP传输场景下,上行信号发送的准确度。
需要说明的是,本申请主要以UE与两个TRP进行通信为例描述方案,应理解,本申请中的方案也适用于UE与多于两个TRP进行通信的mTRP传输场景。
以下先对本申请适用的几种mTRP传输场景分别进行说明。
其中,mTRP传输场景主要包括Intra-cell mTRP场景和Inter-cell mTRP场景:
(1)Intra-cell mTRP场景
Intra-cell mTRP场景指的是UE在一个服务小区中,与多个TRP进行数据传输,即多个TRP为同一个小区提供服务,或者,也可以理解成多个TRP关联相同的物理小区标识(physical cell identity,PCI)。示例性地,请参见图4,图4是本申请实施例提供的Intra-cell mTRP传输场景的示意图。如图4所示,TRP#1和TRP#2属于同一网络设备,或者理解为TRP#1和TRP#2对应同一小区。该TRP#1和TRP#2可以用于为UE提供mTRP传输,即Intra-cell mTRP传输。
(2)Inter-cell mTRP场景
Inter-cell mTRP场景指的是UE在一个服务小区中,除了与本服务小区的TRP通信外,还能与另一个小区的TRP进行通信。在Inter-cell mTRP场景中,可以理解为与UE通信的多个TRP关联不同的PCI。示例性地,请参见图5,图5是本申请实施例提供的Inter-cell mTRP传输场景的示意图。如图5所示,TRP#1属于网络设备1,TRP#2属于网络设备2,或者理解为TRP#1对应小区1,TRP#2对应小区2。小区1的TRP#1和小区2的TRP#2可以通过协作,进行mTRP传输,即Inter-cell mTRP传输。
应理解,图5中将为小区1提供服务的网络设备记作网络设备1,为小区2提供服务的网络设备记作网络设备2,但在一些可能的部署场景中,例如小区1和小区2为同一个基站下的两个小区,即小区1和小区2是同站部署的,那下述网络设备1和网络设备2即为同一个网络设备。相应地,下述的网络设备1和网络设备2的交互可以理解为一个网络设备内部的实现,且为本申请实施例的可选步骤。
进一步地,针对mTRP传输场景,又具体包括两个情况:
(a)情况a:UE在进行mTRP传输之前,会先与单个TRP建立通信连接,例如UE先与TRP#1通信,以获取TRP#1的TA,之后再在网络设备的指示下,开始mTRP传输,建立与TRP#2的通信,以获取TRP#2的TA。
(b)情况b:UE可直接在某个小区中建立mTRP传输,即UE需同时获取TRP#1和TRP#2的TA。
需要说明的是,情况a与情况b下的TA管理,主要在初始TA获取阶段的过程有区别,后续TA更新维护以及TA失效后的UE/网络设备行为是一致的。以下各个实施例将分别针对Intra-cell mTRP场景和Inter-cell mTRP场景中的情况a和情况b下的TA管理过程进行完整描述。
下面对本申请提供的通信方法及通信装置进行详细介绍:
请参见图6,图6是本申请实施例提供的通信方法的一流程示意图。其中,步骤601~步骤605的执行主体为终端设备或者网络设备,或者为终端设备或网络设备中的芯片。以下以终端设备和网络设备为方法的执行主体为例进行说明。
需要说明的是,图6中涉及的终端设备已获取了与第一TRP通信的第一TA,即图6所示实施例主要描述了Intra-cell mTRP场景的情况a下TA管理。
如图6所示,该通信方法包括如下步骤S601~步骤S605,其中步骤S601~步骤S603主要为针对Intra-cell mTRP场景的情况a下的初始TA获取描述,步骤S604主要为针对Intra-cell mTRP场景的情况a下TA更新调整的描述,步骤S605主要为针对Intra-cell mTRP场景的情况a下TA失效后的行为处理的描述。其中:
S601、终端设备获取来自网络设备的第一资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息。
在一些可行的实施方式中,网络设备可以向终端设备发送一个或者多个资源的配置信息,其中该一个或者多个资源包括第一资源。例如,当网络设备只发送了一个资源的配置信息时,该一个资源即为第一资源,当网络设备发送了多个(即两个或两个以上)资源的配置信息时,该多个资源中包括第一资源。
其中,该一个或者多个资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息可以同时携带在一条消息中,例如该一个或者多个资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息携带于mTRP传输的配置消息中,也就是说,网络设备向终端设备发送mTRP传输的配置消息,该mTRP传输的配置消息中包括一个或者多个资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息。
可选的,在另一些可行的实施方式中,该一个或者多个资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息也可以各自携带于一条消息中,例如一个或者多个资源的配置信息携带于第一消息中,用于指示获取TA的信息携带于第二消息中,也就是说,网络设备向终端设备发送第一消息和第二消息,其中,第一消息中包括一个或者多个资源的配置信息,第二消息中包括用于指示获取TA的信息(或者说第二消息可以用于指示获取TA,下述以第二消息中包括用于指示获取TA的信息为例)。其中,网络设备向终端设备发送第一消息和第二消息的发送顺序在此不做限制。示例性地,上述第一消息为mTRP传输的配置消息。示例性地,上述第二消息为物理下行控制信道命令(PDCCH order)。可选的,第二消息也可以为MAC CE等,在此不做限制。
其中,当一个或者多个资源的配置信息携带于第一消息中,用于指示获取TA的信息携带于第二消息中时,终端设备在接收到第一消息之后,并不立即执行S602,而是等到接收到第二消息之后,再执行S602。举个例子,以资源的配置信息为非竞争的随机接入资源为例,当终端设备接收到第二TRP对应的非竞争的随机接入资源时,终端设备并不立即发起随机接入过程,而是等待收到第二消息之后,再发起随机接入过程。
需要说明的是,本申请实施例中涉及的“mTRP传输的配置消息”可以理解为用于配置mTRP传输的消息,其中,该mTRP传输的配置消息可以为RRC(Radio Resource Control,无线资源控制)消息,或其他协议层的消息,本申请不做限定。本申请实施例中涉及的“用于指示获取TA的信息”可以理解为用于指示终端设备向网络设备发送用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息,也就是说,只要是终端设备获取之后,获知需要通过第一资源向网络设备发送上行消息(例如前导码,SRS)的信息都可以理解为用于指示获取TA的信息,即不限定信息本身所表征的含义是指示获取TA。例如,“用于指示获取TA的信息”是特殊格式的下行控制信息(downlink control information,DCI)。
可理解的,在一种实施方式中,网络设备向终端设备发送一个或者多个资源的配置信息具体可以理解为:网络设备向终端设备发送了一个或者多个资源中各个资源与TRP之间的对应关系,其中任意一个资源和某个TRP的对应关系包括该资源的配置信息和该TRP的标识信息,例如该TRP的标识信息可以是TRPID等,在此不做限制。也就是说,终端设备除了被配置了一个或者多个资源的配置信息,终端设备还知道被配置的一个或者多个资源中各个资源应该与哪个TRP一一对应。
例如,以上述一个或者多个资源中的第一资源为例,假设该第一资源对应第二TRP,那么网络设备向终端设备发送的第一资源和第二TRP的对应关系包括第一资源的配置信息和第二TRP的标识信息。可理解的,由于终端设备接收的资源的配置信息和对应的TRP的标识信息携带于同一消息(例如mTRP传输的配置消息,或者第一消息)中,因此终端设备自然可以获知配置的该资源和TRP的标识信息之间具有对应关系。具体地,当mTRP传输的配置消息或者第一消息中包括一个资源的配置信息和该资源的配置信息对应的TRP的标识信息时,终端设备可以确定该mTRP传输的配置消息或者第一消息中包括的资源和TRP的标识信息之间具有对应关系;当mTRP传输的配置消息或者第一消息中包括多个资源的配置信息和该多个资源中各个资源对应的TRP的标识信息时,终端设备可以根据该mTRP传输的配置消息或者第一消息中包括的资源的配置信息和该资源对应的TRP的标识信息,确定多个资源的配置信息和多个资源中各个资源的对应的TRP的标识信息之间的对应关系。基于此,本申请实施例中网络设备向终端设备发送一个或者多个资源的配置信息也可以理解为:网络设备向终端设备发送一个或者多个资源的配置信息和各个资源对应的TRP的标识信息。
可选的,在另一种实施方式中,网络设备向终端设备发送的一个或者多个资源的配置信息中也可以不包括TRP的标识信息,也就是说,终端设备通过mTRP传输的配置消息或者第一消息,只知道被配置了一个或者多个资源的配置信息,而不知道该一个或者多个资源的配置信息具体是为哪个或哪些TRP配置的,该种情况下,如果终端设备想知道各个资源的配置信息分别是针对哪个TRP的,那么还可以根据TRP与 参数名称之间的关联关系确定。具体地,参数名称可以是mTRP传输的配置消息或者第一消息的名称,或者,参数名称也可以是配置用于获取TA的一个或者多个资源的参数名称。例如参数名1(记作ResourceforTRP1)对应的配置内容为Resource1,则终端设备根据ResourceforTRP1,可以确定Resource1对应TRP1,又例如,参数名2(记作ResourceforTRP2)对应的配置内容为Resource2,则终端设备根据ResourceforTRP2,可以确定Resource2对应TRP2。因此,终端设备可以根据参数名称与TRP之间的关联关系,确定第一资源的配置信息对应第二TRP,进而确定后续收到的TA是对应第二TRP的。
可选的,在另一种实施方式中,当网络设备向终端设备发送的一个或者多个资源的配置信息中不包括一个或者多个资源中各个资源与TRP的对应关系时,即终端设备通过mTRP传输的配置消息或者第一消息,只知道被配置了一个或者多个资源的配置信息,而不知道该一个或者多个资源的配置信息具体是为哪个或哪些TRP配置时,如果终端设备想知道后续收到的TA是对应哪个TRP的,那么还可以通过以下步骤S602中描述的方式(一)或方式(二)实现,在此不进行详细描述。
后续主要以第一资源的配置信息是针对第二TRP的为例进行示意性说明。
可理解的,当网络设备只发送了一个资源的配置信息(即网络设备只为终端设备配置了一个资源)时,该一个资源即为第一资源,因此终端设备可以使用该第一资源向网络设备发送用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息。
可选的,当网络设备发送了多个资源的配置信息(即网络设备为终端设备配置了多个资源)时,那么网络设备还需要向终端设备发送所使用资源的指示信息(例如后续以第一资源的指示信息为例),以告知终端设备后续使用第一资源向网络设备发送用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息。可选的,当终端设备被配置了多个资源时,也可以由终端设备自行确定应该使用多个资源中的第一资源向网络设备发送用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息。为方便理解,当网络设备发送了多个资源的配置信息时,以下主要以网络设备通过向终端设备发送第一资源的指示信息的方式告知终端设备,其后续应该使用第一资源向网络设备发送用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息为例进行示意性说明。
具体地,在一种实现中,第一资源的指示信息可以携带于mTRP传输的配置消息中,也就是说,当资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息同时携带于一条消息时,网络设备除了需要通过mTRP传输的配置消息为终端设备配置多个资源以及用于指示获取TA的信息,还需要为终端设备指定/指示所使用的第一资源,该第一资源对应第二TRP。示例性地,第一资源的指示信息可以为第一资源的标识,该第一资源的标识用于唯一标识该第一资源。
在另一种实现中,第一资源的指示信息可以携带于第二消息中,也就是说,当多个资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息各自携带于一条消息(其中多个资源的配置信息承载于第一消息,用于指示获取TA的信息承载于第二消息)时,第二消息中还可以包括第一资源的指示信息(或者说,第二消息可以用于指示第一资源),即网络设备除了需要通过第一消息为终端设备配置多个资源以及通过第二消息携带用于指示获取TA的信息,还需要通过第二消息为终端设备指定/指示所使用的第一资源。示例性地,第一资源的指示信息可以为PDCCH order,或者,MAC CE等,在此不做限制。
可理解的,上述本申请实施例中各个资源与TRP的标识信息之间的对应关系可在第一消息中配置,也可以在第二消息中指示。终端设备根据该对应关系,在使用某个资源发送用于确定某个TRP的TA的信息时,根据该资源与TRP的标识信息之间的对应关系可以确定之后接收的TA为哪个TRP对应的TA。
为方便描述,以下本申请实施例主要以第一资源,以及第一资源对应第二TRP为例进行示例性说明,也就是说,第一资源与第二TRP的标识信息之间的对应关系可以使后续终端设备在使用第一资源发送用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息时,根据该第一资源与第二TRP的标识信息之间的对应关系可以确定之后接收的第二TA为第二TRP对应的TA。
示例性地,在一种实现中,上述第一资源可以为波束(或描述为波束方向),基于此,终端设备可以采用该波束(或者在该波束方向上)向网络设备发送用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息。对于网络设备而言,网络设备在该波束(或者在该波束方向上)上接收到来自终端设备用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息后,可以根据接收到的信息计算出第二TA,进一步地,网络设备可以使用与接收信息相同的波束向终端设备反馈指示第二TA的信息。相应地,终端设备在该波束上接收来自网络设备的指示第二TA的信息后,终端设备即可以根据波束与第二TRP的标识信息之间的对应关系,确定在该波束上接收到的TA是针对第二TRP的TA。需要说明的是,本申请实施例中的波束或波束方向与物理广播信道块(synchronization signal and physical broadcast channel block,SSB)标识关联,例如SSB#2关联第二TRP的波束方向,因此,终端设备根据SSB#2,可以确定第二TRP对应的波束方向。可选的,除SSB外,也 可通过其他类型的参考信号与波束或波束方向关联,例如信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information reference signal,CSI-RS),本申请实施例不限定具体的与波束或波束方向关联的参考信号的类型。
再示例性地,在另一种实现中,第一资源可以为随机接入的资源,或者,第一资源为SRS的资源。其中,该随机接入的资源或SRS的资源为与第二TRP关联的资源,或者说,mTRP传输的配置消息或第一消息中指示了该随机接入的资源或SRS的资源为第二TRP对应的随机接入的资源或SRS的资源。因此,终端设备使用与第二TRP关联的随机接入的资源或SRS的资源向网络设备发送用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息之后,终端设备自然可以确定后续接收到的TA为第二TRP对应的TA。
示例性地,本申请以第一资源的配置信息为例,第一资源的配置信息可以为随机接入的资源的配置信息,或者,第一资源的配置信息可以为SRS的资源的配置信息。例如,随机接入的资源的配置信息可以包括波束(或称为波束方向),随机接入的前导码,时域资源,频域资源,波束与时域资源和频域资源间的映射关系,第二TRP的标识信息,第二TRP对应的小区的标识信息等配置中的一项或者多项。又例如,SRS的资源的配置信息可以包括波束(或称为波束方向),时域资源,频域资源,波束与时域资源和频域资源间的映射关系,第二TRP的标识信息,第二TRP对应的小区的标识信息等配置中的一项或者多项。
可理解的,mTRP传输的配置消息中除了还可以包括以下第二TRP对应的第二资源的配置信息中的至少一项:第二TRP对应的物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel,PDCCH)资源的配置信息,第二TRP对应的物理上行控制信道(physical uplink control channel,PUCCH)资源的配置信息,第二TRP对应的用于半静态信道状态信息上报的物理上行共享信道(physical uplink shared channel,PUSCH)资源的配置信息,第二TRP对应的下行分配资源的配置信息,第二TRP对应的上行授权资源的配置信息,第二TRP对应的波束和/或波束集的配置信息,上行参考信号对应的资源的配置信息,第二TRP对应的TA Group(即TAG)标识等信息,在此不做限制。可理解的,终端设备使用相同的TA向具有相同TA组标识的小区/TRP进行上行信号发送。其中,第二资源中第二TRP对应的波束和/或波束集可以包括第一资源中包括的波束,第二资源中上行参考信号对应的资源可以包括第一资源中包括的SRS对应的资源。
需要说明的是,本申请中涉及的第二资源皆理解为第二TRP对应的资源,针对如何确定第二资源与第二TRP之间对应关系的实现可参见上述确定第一资源和第二TRP的对应关系的描述(即可以在第二资源的配置信息中明确包括第二TRP的标识信息,或者,通过TRP与参数名称之间的关联关系确定),在此不再详细描述。
其中,上述第二TRP对应的PDCCH资源的配置,例如可以是控制资源集合(control resource set,CORESET)的配置,第二TRP对应的波束和/或波束集的配置,例如可以是一些同步信号和物理广播信道块(synchronization signal and physical broadcast channel block,SSB)标识,信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information reference signal,CSI-RS)标识,和/或传输配置指示状态(transmission configuration indication state,TCI State)标识等配置。第二TRP对应的上行参考信号配置,例如可以是一个或者多个SRS的配置等。
S602、终端设备根据用于指示获取TA的信息,使用第一资源向网络设备发送用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息。相应地,网络设备在第一资源上接收来自终端设备的用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息。
也就是说,终端设备基于用于指示获取TA的信息的触发,可以使用第一资源向网络设备发送用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息。
示例性地,在一种实现中,当第一资源为随机接入的资源时,终端设备向网络设备发送的用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息为随机接入前导码或称为前导码。
可选的,在另一种实现中,当第一资源为SRS的资源时,终端设备向网络设备发送的用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息为SRS。
需要说明的是,在一种实施方式中,若终端设备在配置mTRP传输的阶段知道被配置的一个或者多个资源,且知道上述一个或多个资源中各个资源分别是为哪个TRP而配置的(即终端设备知道各个资源与TRP的标识信息之间的对应关系),那么终端设备可以根据资源与TRP的标识信息之间的对应关系确定随后接收的TA为针对哪个TRP的TA,具体参见上述步骤S601中的相关描述,在此不再进行赘述。
可选的,在另一种实施方式中,若终端设备在配置mTRP传输的阶段仅知道被配置的一个或者多个资源,而不知道上述一个或多个资源中各个资源分别是为哪个TRP而配置(即终端设备不知道各个资源与TRP的标识信息之间的对应关系),那么终端设备可以采用如下2种方式中的任意一种方式确定后续接收到的TA为针对哪个TRP的TA:
在(方式一)中,若一个或者多个资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息各自携带于一条消息中, 例如一个或者多个资源的配置信息携带于第一消息中,用于指示获取TA的信息携带于第二消息中,那么还可以在第二信息中携带第一资源和第二TRP的对应关系。这里,第一资源和第二TRP的对应关系包括第一资源的指示信息和第二TRP的标识信息。也就是说,第二消息中可以包括一个域,该域用于指示TRP相关的身份标识(例如指示第二TRP的标识信息),因此,终端设备根据第二消息可以确定本次根据用于指示获取TA的信息,向网络设备发送的用于确定TA的信息为针对第二TRP发起的,进而后续接收到的TA也为第二TRP对应的TA。可选的,当有2个TRP(即第一TRP和第二TRP)为终端设备提供服务时,第二消息中的该域用于指示本次TA获取不是针对第一TRP的。
在(方式二)中,网络设备可以在向终端设备发送指示第二TA的信息的同时,向终端设备发送指示TRP相关的身份标识(例如指示第二TRP的标识信息),相应地,终端设备接收来自网络设备的用于指示第二TA的信息和第二TRP的标识信息。也就是说,网络设备除了向终端设备反馈第二TA的信息,还可以向终端设备反馈与第二TA的信息相关联的第二TRP的标识信息,因此,终端设备可以根据网络设备反馈的用于指示第二TA的信息和第二TRP的标识信息,确定所接收到的第二TA为针对第二TRP的TA。
S603、终端设备接收来自网络设备的指示第二TA的信息。
在一些可行的实施方式中,网络设备可以根据接收到的用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息计算出第二TA,并向终端设备反馈指示第二TA的信息。相应地,终端设备接收来自网络设备的指示第二TA的信息。
具体地,在一种实现中,若终端设备通过发起随机接入的方式获取第二TRP的第二TA(即终端设备向网络设备发送的用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息为前导码时),那么网络设备可以随机接入响应消息或MAC CE中携带用于指示第二TA的信息。
在另一种实现中,若终端设备向网络设备发送的用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息为SRS,那么网络设备根据接收到的SRS计算出第二TA后,可以通过MAC CE携带用于指示第二TA的信息以发送给终端设备。
需要说明的是,若终端设备在上述步骤S601和S602中仅知道自己被配置的一个或者多个资源,而不知道上述一个或多个资源中各个资源分别是为哪个TRP而配置(即终端设备不知道各个资源与TRP的标识信息之间的对应关系),且上述(方式一)也不存在时,网络设备可以通过上述(方式二)确定所接收到的第二TA为针对第二TRP的TA。也就是说,网络设备除了向终端设备反馈第二TA的信息,还可以向终端设备反馈与第二TA的信息相关联的第二TRP的标识信息,因此,终端设备可以根据网络设备反馈的用于指示第二TA的信息和第二TRP的标识信息,确定所接收到的第二TA为针对第二TRP的TA。再换句话说,随机接入响应消息或MAC CE中可以包括一个域,该域用于指示TRP相关的身份标识(例如指示第二TRP的标识信息),因此,终端设备根据接收到的随机接入响应消息或MAC CE中该域,可以确定该随机接入响应消息或MAC CE中携带的用于指示第二TA的信息为针对第二TRP的TA。
需要说明的是,指示第二TA的信息包括以下任意一项:第二TA的值、或第一TA的值与第二TA的值之间的差值信息。可理解的,相较于网络设备直接向终端设备反馈第二TA的值的方式,网络设备向终端设备反馈第一TA的值与第二TA的值之间的差值信息的方式可减少信令开销。
举例来说,假设网络设备计算出该终端设备针对TRP#2的TA(记作TA2),示例性地,由于网络设备已知终端设备针对TRP#1的TA(记作TA1),网络设备可将TA2与TA1的差值,通过MAC CE发送给终端设备,终端设备收到该值(TA2-TA1)后,在TA1的基础上,叠加上该值(TA2-TA1),计算得到TA2。该方式的好处是,直接携带TA2的值会占据较多的信令开销,而指示(TA2-TA1)可以使用较少的比特完成指示。
需要说明的是,本申请中第二TA用于终端设备与第二TRP通信,也就是说,终端设备可以使用第二TA与第二TRP通信。
可选的,在一些可行的实施方式中,当终端设备基于上述步骤S601~S603成功获取第二TRP的第二TA后,终端设备可以释放此前在S601中配置的第一资源,这样有利于网络设备及时回收资源。
可选的,在一些可行的实施方式中,当终端设备基于上述步骤S601~S603成功获取第二TRP的第二TA之后,终端设备还可以对各个TRP对应的TA进行更新维护。
S604、终端设备和网络设备对TRP对应的TA进行更新维护。
其中,终端设备在收到网络设备指示的第二TA的信息时,可以启动第二TRP对应的第二定时器,或者,终端设备可以启动第二TRP所属的TAG对应的第二定时器。其中一个TAG中包括的所有TRP对应的TA相同。可理解的,在第二定时器到期之前,均认为该第二TA有效。
可理解的,终端设备此前已维护着第一TRP对应的第一TA,且终端设备也会维护着第一TRP或第一TRP所属的TAG对应的第一定时器,在第一定时器到期之前,均认为第一TA有效。
可选的,当终端设备使用第二TA与第二TRP通信,和/或使用第一TA与第一TRP通信过程中,网络设备可以通过终端设备发送的上行信号,判断出是否需要对第一TRP和/或第二TRP进行调整。其中,当网络设备确定需要调整TA时,可向终端设备发送TA调整命令,该命令中除了指示应调整的TA值外,还应让终端设备能够识别该调整命令应该适用于哪个TRP。
其中,为方便理解,如下主要以需要调整的TA为第二TRP对应的TA为例进行示意性说明。具体地,可以通过如下两种方式使终端设备识别该调整命令应该适用于第二TRP:
在一种实现方式中,调整命令中包括第二TRP的标识信息(或者第二TRP所属TAG的标识信息),以及第二TRP对应的TA更新信息,TA更新信息用于更新第二TRP对应的TA。
在另一种实现中,在终端设备知道mTRP传输的配置消息中包括的第二资源是为第二TRP而配置的前提下,网络设备可使用第二资源向终端设备发送调整命令,相应地,终端设备使用第二资源接收来自网络设备的调整命令,因此,可以根据第二资源与第二TRP之间的对应关系,确定该调整命令为针对第二TRP的调整命令。其中,该调整命令中包括第二TRP对应的TA更新信息,TA更新信息用于更新第二TRP对应的TA。
例如,以第二资源为波束(或描述为波束方向)为例,网络设备可以通过与第二TRP关联的波束发送该调整命令,相应地,终端设备在该波束或波束方向上接收来自网络设备的调整命令,根据波束与TRP之间的对应关系,可以确定该调整命令为针对第二TRP的调整命令。
又例如,以第二资源为第二TRP对应的PDCCH配置为例,网络设备可以通过第二TRP对应的PDCCH发送一个下行分配消息,该下行分配消息指示终端设备如何接收该调整命令,相应地,终端设备根据该PDCCH指示的下行分配消息,接收来自网络设备的调整命令,根据PDCCH与TRP之间的对应关系,可以确定该调整命令为针对第二TRP的调整命令。
需要说明的是,终端设备接收来自网络设备针对第二TRP的调整命令之后,终端设备需要启动或重启第二TRP对应的第二定时器。
相应地,如果需要调整的TA为第一TRP对应的TA,那么也可以通过如下两种方式使终端设备识别该调整命令应该适用于第一TRP:
在一种实现方式中,调整命令中包括第一TRP的标识信息(或者第一TRP所属TAG的标识信息),以及第一TRP对应的TA更新信息,TA更新信息用于更新第一TRP对应的TA。
在另一种实现中,在终端设备获取与第一TRP通信的第一TA的过程中,终端设备已获得了第一TRP相关的配置/资源信息。例如终端设备在先前的配置中,已获得第一TRP相关联的PDCCH资源的配置信息或波束和/或波束集的配置信息,那么网络设备可使用与第一TRP关联的资源向终端设备发送调整命令,相应地,终端设备使用与第一TRP关联的资源接收来自网络设备的调整命令,因此,可以根据与第一TRP关联的资源与第一TRP之间的对应关系,确定该调整命令为针对第一TRP的调整命令。其中,该调整命令中包括第一TRP对应的TA更新信息,TA更新信息用于更新第一TRP对应的TA。
例如,以与第一TRP关联的资源为波束(或描述为波束方向)为例,网络设备可以通过与第一TRP关联的波束发送该调整命令,相应地,终端设备在该波束或波束方向上接收来自网络设备的调整命令,根据波束与TRP之间的对应关系,可以确定该调整命令为针对第一TRP的调整命令。
又例如,以与第一TRP关联的资源为第一TRP对应的PDCCH配置为例,网络设备可以通过第一TRP对应的PDCCH发送一个下行分配消息,该下行分配消息指示终端设备如何接收该调整命令,相应地,终端设备根据该PDCCH指示的下行分配消息,接收来自网络设备的调整命令,根据PDCCH与TRP之间的对应关系,可以确定该调整命令为针对第一TRP的调整命令。
需要说明的是,终端设备接收来自网络设备针对第一TRP的调整命令之后,终端设备需要启动或重启第一TRP对应的第一定时器。
可选的,在一些可行的实施方式中,当任意一个定时器超时时,终端设备和网络设备还需要对超时的定时器所维护的TA进行失效处理:
S605、终端设备和网络设备对失效的TA进行处理。
其中,当第一定时器未超时,且第二定时器超时时,终端设备执行以下操作中的至少一项操作:
1、终端设备清空第二TRP对应的混合自动重传请求HARQ进程的缓存;
2、终端设备释放第二TRP对应的PUCCH资源,和/或,上行参考信号对应的资源;
3、终端设备清空第二TRP对应的预配置的下行分配资源和上行授权资源;
4、终端设备清空第二TRP对应的用于半静态信道状态信息上报关联的PUSCH资源;
5、终端设备维持第二TRP对应的TA;
6、终端设备根据第一TA向第一TRP发送指示信息,指示信息用于指示第二TRP对应的TA失效。其中,上述终端设备根据第一TA向第一TRP发送指示信息还可以理解为:当终端设备中待发送数据的数据量大于或者等于第一阈值时,终端设备根据第一TA向第一TRP发送指示信息。该指示信息用于指示第二TRP对应的TA失效。也就是说,终端设备可以在发现第二TRP对应的第二TA失效时,立即通过根据第一TA发送指示信息以告知网络设备第二TRP对应的TA失效。通过该方式,能够及时令网络设备获知终端设备的上行发生了失步的状况,网络设备可调整上行调度行为,例如网络设备后续不在第二TRP进行上行数据调度。或者,终端设备也可以在发现第二TRP对应的第二TA失效时,不立即上报,而是等待终端设备中待发送数据的数据量超过第一阈值时,再根据第一TA发送指示信息以告知网络设备第二TRP对应的TA失效。通过该方式,能够在终端设备上行业务量较大时,及时通知网络设备终端设备的上行发生了失步的状况,网络设备后续可重新令终端获取第二TA信息。
需要说明的是,上述指示信息可以用于触发网络设备基于该指示信息再次下发第二消息,以触发随机接入过程或SRS发送过程,获取第二TRP对应的新的TA。
可选的,若步骤S601中配置的用于获取TA的一个或者多个资源未被终端设备释放,终端设备还可以利用该一个或者多个资源向第二TRP发送用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息,进一步地,若用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息为随机接入前导码,即终端发起了随机接入过程,则终端可以在随机接入过程中,向网络设备发送原因值,该原因值用于指示随机接入过程触发的原因为获取第二TRP的第二TA,示例性地,该原因值可携带在四步随机接入过程的消息3中。
其中,当第二定时器未超时,且第一定时器超时时,终端设备执行以下操作中的至少一项操作:
1、终端设备清空第一TRP对应的混合自动重传请求HARQ进程的缓存;
2、终端设备释放第一TRP对应的PUCCH资源,和/或,上行参考信号对应的资源;
3、终端设备清空第一TRP对应的预配置的下行分配资源和上行授权资源;
4、终端设备清空第一TRP对应的用于半静态信道状态信息上报关联的PUSCH资源;
5、终端设备维持第一TRP对应的TA;
6、终端设备根据第二TA向第二TRP发送指示信息,指示信息用于指示第一TRP对应的TA失效。其中,上述终端设备根据第二TA向第二TRP发送指示信息还可以理解为:当终端设备中待发送数据的数据量大于或者等于第二阈值时,终端设备根据第二TA向第二TRP发送指示信息,指示信息用于指示第一TRP对应的TA失效。也就是说,终端设备可以在发现第一TRP对应的第一TA失效时,立即通过根据第二TA发送指示信息以告知网络设备第一TRP对应的TA失效。通过该方式,能够及时令网络设备获知终端设备的上行发生了失步的状况,网络设备可调整上行调度行为,例如网络设备后续不在第一TRP进行上行数据调度。或者,终端设备也可以在发现第一TRP对应的第一TA失效时,不立即上报,而是等待终端设备中待发送数据的数据量超过第二阈值时,再根据第二TA发送指示信息以告知网络设备第一TRP对应的TA失效。通过该方式,能够在终端设备上行业务量较大时,及时通知网络设备终端设备的上行发生了失步的状况,网络设备后续可重新令终端获取第一TA信息。
其中,第一阈值和第二阈值的设置可以相同,也可以不同,在此不做限制。
需要说明的是,上述指示信息可以用于触发网络设备基于该指示信息再次下发第二消息,以触发随机接入过程或SRS发送过程,获取第一TRP对应的新的TA。
可选的,若用于获取第一TA的资源(例如以第三资源进行示意性说明)未被终端设备释放,终端设备还可以利用第三资源向第一TRP发送用于确定第一TRP的第一TA的信息,进一步地,若用于确定第一TRP的第一TA的信息为随机接入前导码,即终端发起了随机接入过程,则终端可以在随机接入过程中,向网络设备发送原因值,该原因值用于指示随机接入过程触发的原因为获取第一TRP的第一TA,示例性地,该原因值可携带在四步随机接入过程的消息3中。
需要说明的是,当终端设备确定部分TRP的TA失效/上行失步时,可通过TA有效/上行同步的TRP,向网络设备告知失效信息,便于网络设备及时将终端设备的上行传输恢复至同步状态,并恢复mTRP传输状态,进而有利于提升可靠性和传输容量。
其中,当第一定时器和第二定时器皆超时时,终端设备执行以下操作中的至少一项操作:
1、终端设备清空第一TRP和第二TRP对应的HARQ进程的缓存;
2、终端设备释放第一TRP和第二TRP对应的PUCCH资源,和/或,上行参考信号对应的资源;
3、终端设备清空第一TRP和第二TRP对应的预配置的下行分配资源和上行授权资源;
4、终端设备清空第一TRP和第二TRP对应的用于半静态信道状态信息上报关联的PUSCH资源;
5、终端设备维持第一TRP对应的TA和第二TRP对应的TA。
需要说明的是,终端设备维持失效的TA因为调整命令中携带的TA更新信息可以为一个调整量,该调整量是基于此前的TA值来调整的,故终端设备需要维持此前失效的TA。在本申请中,维持也可以理解为保存。
需要说明的是,上述图6所示实施例中描述的第一TRP和第二TRP可以对应同一小区,即第一TRP和第二TRP为同一网络设备对应的两个TRP,也即Intra-cell mTRP场景。
在本申请实施例中,对于Intra-cell mTRP场景,终端设备在已获取与第一TRP通信的第一TA的前提下,终端设备还能够获取第二TRP的初始TA,并更新维护多个TRP的TA。基于此,终端设备能够以准确的上行发送时间,向不同的TRP发送信号,减少网络侧的信号干扰,提升通信可靠性。
在另一个实施例中,第一TRP和第二TRP也可以对应不同的小区(即Inter-cell mTRP场景),例如后续皆以第一TRP可以对应小区1,第二TRP可以对应小区2为例进行示意性说明。其中,可以将为小区1提供服务的网络设备记作网络设备1,为小区2提供服务的网络设备记作网络设备2。可选的,在一些可能的部署场景中,当小区1和小区2为同一个基站下的两个小区,即小区1和小区2是同站部署的,那下述网络设备1和网络设备2即为同一个网络设备。相应地,下述的网络设备1和网络设备2的交互可以理解为一个网络设备内部的实现,且为本申请实施例的可选步骤。
为方便理解,下面将针对第一TRP和第二TRP对应不同的小区时,情况a下的TA管理进行描述。也就是说,终端设备已经事先在网络设备1对应的小区1中获取了与第一TRP通信的第一TA,后续需要在网络设备2对应的小区2中获取与第二TRP通信的第二TA,其中,网络设备1对应的小区1为服务小区,网络设备2对应的小区2可以称为辅助小区或额外小区,本申请实施例对小区2的名称不作限定,可以理解为,小区2为小区1提供了额外的通信资源,例如波束资源。
请参见图7,图7是本申请实施例提供的通信方法的另一流程示意图。其中,步骤700~步骤707的执行主体为终端设备或者网络设备(例如网络设备1或网络设备2),或者为终端设备或网络设备中的芯片。以下以终端设备和网络设备为方法的执行主体为例进行说明。
需要说明的是,图7中涉及的终端设备已获取了与第一TRP通信的第一TA,即图7所示实施例主要描述了Inter-cell mTRP场景的情况a下TA管理。
如图7所示,该通信方法包括如下步骤S700~步骤S707,其中步骤S700~步骤S703主要为针对Inter-cell mTRP场景的情况a下的初始TA获取描述,步骤S704主要为针对Inter-cell mTRP场景的情况a下TA更新调整的描述,步骤S705主要为针对Inter-cell mTRP场景的情况a下TA失效后的行为处理的描述,步骤S706~S707主要为一种扩展场景下的方案。其中:
S700、网络设备1与网络设备2进行信息交互,以获取用于mTRP传输的资源。
终端设备所在的服务小区(记作小区1)由网络设备1提供服务,当网络设备1根据当前信道状况与业务流量情况,判断需要与小区2(由网络设备2提供服务)以Inter-cell mTRP的方式与终端设备通信时,网络设备1与网络设备2进行信息交互,以获得小区2的mTRP传输的配置信息,该mTRP传输的配置信息中包括第一资源的配置信息,该第一资源的配置信息用于终端设备使用第一资源向网络设备2发送用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息。
具体地,步骤S700可包括:(1)网络设备1向网络设备2发送一条请求消息,该请求消息用于请求小区2为终端设备分配用于mTRP传输的资源;(2)网络设备2向网络设备1回复一条响应消息,该响应消息中包括小区2为终端设备分配的用于mTRP传输的资源,即该响应消息中包括mTRP传输的配置信息,其中该mTRP传输的配置信息中包括一个或者多个资源的配置信息,其中该一个或者多个资源包括第一资源。
其中,第一资源的配置信息可以为随机接入的资源的配置信息,或者,第一资源的配置信息可以为SRS资源的配置信息。可理解的,上述随机接入的资源的配置信息可以为用于非竞争的随机接入的资源的配置信息,因此,后续终端设备使用完该非竞争的随机接入的资源获取TA后,终端设备可以释放该配置。可选的,上述随机接入的资源的配置信息也可以为用于竞争的随机接入的资源的配置信息(公共资源),因此,后续终端设备使用该公共资源获取TA后,可仍保留该配置。
可理解的,该步骤S700为可选步骤,例如当小区1和小区2为同站部署时,即网络设备1和网络设备2为同一个网络设备时,信息交互可由该设备的内部信息交换实现。
S701、终端设备获取来自网络设备1的第一资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息。
这里,针对S701的理解可参见上述图6中针对步骤S601的描述,只需要将步骤S601中的网络设备替换为网络设备1理解即可,在此不再赘述。
需要说明的是,当步骤S601中第一资源的配置信息携带于mTRP传输的配置消息时,该S701中涉及的mTRP传输的配置消息可以理解为网络设备1基于S700中的mTRP传输的配置信息生成的消息。
S702、终端设备根据用于指示获取TA的信息,使用第一资源向网络设备2发送用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息。相应地,网络设备2在第一资源上接收来自终端设备的用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息。
这里,针对S702的理解可参见上述图6中针对步骤S602的描述,只需要将步骤S602中的网络设备替换为网络设备2理解即可,在此不再赘述。不同之处在于,S602中有关第二TRP相关的标识指示,例如第二TRP的标识信息,在S702中,可以是第二TRP的标识信息,也可以是第二小区的标识。
S703、终端设备接收来自网络设备2的指示第二TA的信息。
这里,终端设备接收来自网络设备2的指示第二TA的信息可以理解为:网络设备2可以直接将计算出的第二TA发送给终端设备,例如在随机接入响应消息或MAC CE中,携带指示第二TA的信息。
可选的,终端设备接收来自网络设备2的指示第二TA的信息还可以理解为:网络设备2将计算出的第二TA,先通过站间交互(或网络设备内部实现),告知网络设备1,再由网络设备1通过小区1的通信资源将指示第二TA的信息告知终端设备。
其中,有关终端设备接收来自网络设备1或网络设备2的指示第二TA的信息的更多理解可参见上述图6中针对S603的描述,只需要将S601中的网络设备替换为网络设备1或网络设备2理解即可,在此不再赘述。不同之处在于,S603中有关第二TRP相关的标识指示,例如第二TRP的标识信息,在S703中,可以是第二TRP的标识信息,也可以是第二小区的标识。
需要说明的是,本申请中第二TA用于终端设备与第二TRP通信,也就是说,终端设备可以使用第二TA与第二TRP通信。
可选的,在一些可行的实施方式中,当终端设备基于上述步骤S601~S603成功获取第二TRP的第二TA之后,终端设备还可以对各个TRP对应的TA进行更新维护。
S704、终端设备和网络设备(网络设备1或网络设备2)对TRP对应的TA进行更新维护。
这里,针对S704的理解可参见上述图6中针对步骤S604的描述,不同之处在于,网络设备1用于对第一TRP对应的TA(即第一TA)进行更新维护,网络设备2用于对第二TRP对应的TA(即第二TA)进行更新维护。不同之处在于,S604中有关第二TRP相关的标识指示,例如第二TRP的标识信息,在S704中,可以是第二TRP的标识信息,也可以是第二小区的标识。
其中,当网络设备2对第二TA进行维护时,网络设备2可以直接向终端设备发送调整命令,或者,网络设备2也可将调整命令,先通过站间交互(或网络设备内部实现),告知网络设备1,由网络设备1通过小区1的通信资源向终端设备发送调整命令。
可选的,在一些可行的实施方式中,当任意一个定时器超时时,终端设备和网络设备还需要对超时的定时器所维护的TA进行失效处理:
S705、终端设备和网络设备(网络设备1或网络设备2)对失效的TA进行处理。
其中,当第一定时器未超时,且第二定时器超时时,终端设备执行以下操作中的至少一项操作:
1、终端设备清空第二TRP对应的混合自动重传请求HARQ进程的缓存;
2、终端设备释放第二TRP对应的PUCCH资源,和/或,上行参考信号对应的资源;
3、终端设备清空第二TRP对应的预配置的下行分配资源和上行授权资源;
4、终端设备清空第二TRP对应的用于半静态信道状态信息上报关联的PUSCH资源;
5、终端设备维持第二TRP对应的TA;
6、终端设备根据第一TA向第一TRP发送指示信息,指示信息用于指示第二TRP对应的TA失效。其中,上述终端设备根据第一TA向第一TRP发送指示信息还可以理解为:当终端设备中待发送数据的数据量大于或者等于第一阈值时,终端设备根据第一TA向第一TRP发送指示信息。该指示信息用于指示第二TRP对应的TA失效。也就是说,终端设备可以在发现第二TRP对应的第二TA失效时,立即通过根据第一TA发送指示信息以告知网络设备1第二TRP对应的TA失效,网络设备1可将该情况通知网络设备 2。通过该方式,能够及时令网络设备2获知终端设备的上行发生了失步的状况,网络设备2可调整上行调度行为,例如网络设备2后续不在第二TRP进行上行数据调度。应理解,在一些可能的部署场景中,当小区1和小区2是同站部署时,即网络设备1和网络设备2为同一个网络设备时,在终端设备将第二TRP对应的TA失效的情况告知该网络设备后,网络设备可调整在小区2或第二TRP上的上行调度行为。或者,终端设备也可以在发现第二TRP对应的第二TA失效时,不立即上报,而是等待终端设备中待发送数据的数据量超过第一阈值时,再根据第一TA发送指示信息以告知网络设备1第二TRP对应的TA失效,网络设备1可直接触发终端设备获取第二TA,或网络设备1可将该情况通知网络设备2,网络设备2后续可重新令终端获取第二TA信息。通过该方式,能够在终端设备上行业务量较大时,及时通知网络设备1或2终端设备的上行发生了失步的状况。应理解,在同站部署的场景中,终端设备将第二TRP对应的TA失效的情况告知网络设备后,网络设备可重新令终端获取第二TA的信息。
需要说明的是,上述指示信息可以用于触发网络设备1或网络设备2基于该指示信息再次下发第二消息,以触发随机接入过程或SRS发送过程,获取第二TRP对应的新的TA。
可选的,若步骤S701中第一资源未被终端设备释放,终端设备还可以利用第一资源向第二TRP发送用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息,进一步地,若用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息为随机接入前导码,即终端发起了随机接入过程,则终端可以在随机接入过程中,向网络设备1发送原因值,该原因值用于指示随机接入过程触发的原因为获取第二TRP的第二TA,示例性地,该原因值可携带在四步随机接入过程的消息3中。
其中,当第二定时器未超时,且第一定时器超时时,终端设备执行以下操作中的至少一项操作:
1、终端设备清空第一TRP对应的混合自动重传请求HARQ进程的缓存;
2、终端设备释放第一TRP对应的PUCCH资源,和/或,上行参考信号对应的资源;
3、终端设备清空第一TRP对应的预配置的下行分配资源和上行授权资源;
4、终端设备清空第一TRP对应的用于半静态信道状态信息上报关联的PUSCH资源;
5、终端设备维持第一TRP对应的TA;
6、终端设备根据第二TA向第二TRP发送指示信息,指示信息用于指示第一TRP对应的TA失效。也就是说,终端设备需要在发现第一TRP对应的第一TA失效时,立即通过根据第二TA发送指示信息以告知网络设备2第一TRP对应的TA失效。原因是在Inter-cell mTRP传输中,服务小区(即小区1)的TRP(即第一TRP)会执行更多的功能,例如,终端设备将测量的信道状态信息反馈给网络设备1时,会通过服务小区的上行资源进行反馈,供网络侧协调进行协作传输的多个TRP各自的传输任务,因此当服务小区TRP发生上行失步时,为快速恢复上行发送,终端设备应通过未失效的TRP将该情况告知网络设备2。可选的,网络设备2可以将该情况告知网络设备1。
需要说明的是,上述指示信息可以用于触发网络设备1或2基于该指示信息下发一条消息,以触发随机接入过程或SRS发送过程,获取第一TRP对应的新的TA。
可选的,终端设备还可以向网络设备2发送原因值,该原因值用于指示随机接入过程触发的原因。具体的步骤可参考步骤S705中第一定时器未超时,且第二定时器超时的情况,此处不再详细描述。
需要说明的是,当终端设备确定部分TRP的TA失效/上行失步时,可通过TA有效/上行同步的TRP,向网络设备告知失效信息,便于网络设备及时将终端设备的上行传输恢复至同步状态,并恢复mTRP传输状态,进而有利于提升可靠性和传输容量。
其中,当第一定时器和第二定时器皆超时时,终端设备执行以下操作中的至少一项操作:
1、终端设备清空第一TRP和第二TRP对应的HARQ进程的缓存;
2、终端设备释放第一TRP和第二TRP对应的PUCCH资源,和/或,上行参考信号对应的资源;
3、终端设备清空第一TRP和第二TRP对应的预配置的下行分配资源和上行授权资源;
4、终端设备清空第一TRP和第二TRP对应的用于半静态信道状态信息上报关联的PUSCH资源;
5、终端设备维持第一TRP对应的TA和第二TRP对应的TA。
需要说明的是,终端设备维持失效的TA因为调整命令中携带的TA更新信息可以为一个调整量,该调整量是基于此前的TA值来调整的,故终端设备需要维持此前失效的TA。在本申请中,维持也可以理解为保存。
可选的,在移动性切换场景(即小区切换场景)中,第一TRP对应源小区,第二TRP对应目标小区,源小区和目标小区为不同的小区。示例性地,源小区为网络设备1管理的小区,目标小区为网络设备2管 理的小区。再一个示例中,若为同站部署场景,即网络设备1和网络设备2为同一网络设备时,源小区和目标小区为同一网络设备管理的两个不同的小区。在上述步骤S703之后,还可以包括如下步骤:
S706、终端设备接收来自源小区的切换命令。
S707、终端设备根据切换命令从源小区切换至目标小区。
其中,该切换命令指示在目标小区中使用第二TA,或者,切换命令用于指示目标小区沿用第二TA。
具体地,网络设备在移动性切换场景(即小区切换场景)中,根据终端设备上报的信道测量结果,以及各小区的负载情况等,可以将终端设备从小区1切换到小区2。在原本的切换流程中,网络设备向终端设备发送切换命令后,终端设备在执行从小区1切换到小区2的过程中,需要在小区2发起随机接入过程,以获取小区2对应的TA,但是在本申请实施例中,如果终端设备已事先通过上述步骤S700~S703或S704获取到的小区2对应的TA(即第二TA),那么网络设备向终端设备发送切换命令后,终端设备在执行从小区1切换到小区2的过程中,便不需要再在小区2发起随机接入过程了,因此可以减少切换带来的中断时间。
其中,在切换命令中,可以携带终端设备在小区2中应使用的TA的指示,例如指示第二TA的值,或者,指示目标小区沿用第二TA。
可选的,若切换命令中不携带在目标小区中使用第二TA的指示,终端设备可将切换命令中指示的目标小区的标识与此前步骤S701中包括的mTRP传输的配置消息中包括的小区的标识进行对比,若目标小区的标识与mTRP传输的配置消息中某个小区的标识一致,则终端设备在切换到目标小区的过程中,也可以使用mTRP传输时该小区的TA,与目标小区进行上行传输,不需进行随机接入的过程。
在本申请实施例中,对于Inter-cell mTRP场景,终端设备可以在已获取与第一TRP通信的第一TA的前提下,终端设备获取第二TRP的初始TA,并更新维护多个TRP的TA。基于此,终端设备能够以准确的上行发送时间,向不同的TRP发送信号,减少网络侧的信号干扰,提升通信可靠性。
上述图6和图7对应的实施例分别描述了Intra-cell mTRP场景或Inter-cell mTRP场景的情况a下的TA管理过程。下面进一步针对Intra-cell mTRP场景或Inter-cell mTRP场景的情况b下的TA管理过程进行描述。
请参见图8,图8是本申请实施例提供的通信方法的另一流程示意图。其中,步骤801~步骤805的执行主体为终端设备或者网络设备,或者为终端设备或网络设备中的芯片。以下以终端设备和网络设备为方法的执行主体为例进行说明。
需要说明的是,图8所示实施例主要描述了Intra-cell mTRP场景的情况b下TA管理。
如图8所示,该通信方法包括如下步骤S801~步骤S805,其中步骤S801~步骤S803主要为针对Intra-cell mTRP场景中情况b下的初始TA获取描述,步骤S804主要为针对Intra-cell mTRP场景中情况b下TA更新调整的描述,步骤S805主要为针对Intra-cell mTRP场景中情况b下TA失效后的行为处理的描述。其中:
S801、网络设备向终端设备发送第一TRP对应的第三资源的配置信息和第二TRP对应的第一资源的配置信息。相应地,终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一TRP对应的第三资源的配置信息和第二TRP对应的第一资源的配置信息。
在一些可行的实施方式中,网络设备向终端设备发送第一TRP对应的第三资源的配置信息和第二TRP对应的第一资源的配置信息,在一种可能的实施方式中,网络设备向终端设备发送切换命令,该切换命令中包括第一TRP对应的第三资源的配置信息和第二TRP对应的第一资源的配置信息。相应地,终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一TRP对应的第三资源的配置信息和第二TRP对应的第一资源的配置信息可以理解为:终端设备接收来自网络设备的切换命令,该切换命令中包括第一TRP对应的第三资源的配置信息和第二TRP对应的第一资源的配置信息。
可选的,切换命令中包括第一TRP对应的第三资源的配置信息和第二TRP对应的第一资源的配置信息还可以理解为:切换命令中包括mTRP传输的配置信息,该mTRP传输的配置信息中包括第一TRP对应的第三资源的配置信息和第二TRP对应的第一资源的配置信息。
具体地,在一种实现中,mTRP传输的配置信息中包括第一TRP对应的第三资源的配置信息和第二TRP对应的第一资源的配置信息可以理解为:mTRP传输的配置信息中包括第三资源和第一TRP的对应关系,以及第一资源和第二TRP的对应关系。其中,第三资源和第一TRP的对应关系包括第三资源的配置信息和第一TRP的标识信息,第一资源和第二TRP的对应关系包括第一资源的配置信息和第二TRP的标识信息。
在另一种实现中,网络设备向终端设备发送的mTRP传输的配置信息中也可以不包括资源对应的TRP的标识信息,而只包括资源的配置信息。也就是说,终端设备通过切换命令中的mTRP传输的配置信息,只知道被配置的资源(即资源的配置信息),而不知道被配置的资源的具体是为哪个TRP配置的。在这种情况下,可参考以下步骤S803中描述的方式,令终端设备知晓后续收到的TA信息是对应于哪个TRP的,这里不进行详细描述。
可理解的,本申请中涉及的第三资源的配置信息可以包括与第一TRP相关联的随机接入的资源的配置信息,或者,第三资源的配置信息可以包括与第一TRP相关联的SRS的资源的配置信息。例如,与第一TRP相关联的随机接入的资源的配置信息可以包括与第一TRP相关联的波束(或称为波束方向),与第一TRP相关联的随机接入的前导码,时域资源,频域资源,波束与时域资源和频域资源间的映射关系等中的一项或者多项。又例如,与第一TRP相关联的SRS的资源的配置信息可以包括与第一TRP相关联的波束(或称为波束方向),与第一TRP相关联的SRS,时域资源,频域资源,波束与时域资源和频域资源间的映射关系,第一TRP的标识信息,第一TRP对应的小区的标识信息等配置中的一项或者多项。
本申请中涉及的第一资源的配置信息可以包括与第二TRP相关联的随机接入的资源的配置信息,或者,第一资源的配置信息可以包括与第二TRP相关联的SRS的资源的配置信息。例如,与第二TRP相关联的随机接入的资源的配置信息可以包括与第二TRP相关联的波束(或称为波束方向),与第二TRP相关联的随机接入的前导码,时域资源,频域资源,波束与时域资源和频域资源间的映射关系等中的一项或者多项。又例如,与第二TRP相关联的SRS的资源的配置信息可以包括与第二TRP相关联的波束(或称为波束方向),与第二TRP相关联的SRS,时域资源,频域资源,波束与时域资源和频域资源间的映射关系,第二TRP的标识信息,第二TRP对应的小区的标识信息等配置中的一项或者多项。
需要说明的是,上述资源与TRP的标识信息之间的对应关系可以使后续终端设备在使用某个资源发送用于确定某个TRP的TA的信息时,根据该资源与TRP的标识信息之间的对应关系可以确定之后接收的TA为哪个TRP对应的TA。也就是说,终端设备根据第三资源和第一TRP的对应关系,可以确定第一TA对应于第一TRP;根据第一资源和第二TRP的对应关系,可以确定第二TA对应于第二TRP。
S802、终端设备使用第三资源向第一TRP发送用于确定第一TRP的第一TA的信息,以及使用第一资源向第二TRP发送用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息。相应地,网络设备通过第一TRP接收来自终端设备的用于确定第一TRP的第一TA的信息,以及通过第二TRP接收来自终端设备的用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息。
其中,关于对“用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息”的理解可参见前述图6中的相关描述,在此不再进行赘述。关于对“用于确定第一TRP的第一TA的信息”的理解也可参见前述图6中的相关描述,只需要将第二换成第一理解即可,在此不再进行赘述。
S803、终端设备接收来自网络设备的指示第一TA的信息和指示第二TA的信息。
其中,关于对“指示第二TA的信息”的理解可参见前述图6中的相关描述,在此不再进行赘述。关于对“指示第一TA的信息”的理解也可参见前述图6中的相关描述,只需要将第二换成第一理解即可,在此不再进行赘述。
在一种实现中,终端设备接收来自网络设备的指示第一TA的信息和指示第二TA的信息可以理解为:终端设备接收来自网络设备的第三消息,第三消息包括指示第一TA的信息和指示第二TA的信息。也就是说,指示第一TA的信息和指示第二TA的信息可以同时携带在一条消息中发送。在另一种实现中,终端设备接收来自网络设备的指示第一TA的信息和指示第二TA的信息可以理解为:终端设备接收来自网络设备的第四消息,第四消息包括指示第一TA的信息;终端设备接收来自网络设备的第五消息,第五消息包括指示第二TA的信息。也就是说,网络设备可回复两条消息,每条消息包括一个TRP对应的TA的信息。
需要说明的是,在一种实施方式中,若终端设备在配置mTRP传输的阶段知道被配置的一个或者多个资源,且知道上述一个或多个资源中各个资源分别是为哪个TRP而配置的(即终端设备知道各个资源与TRP的标识信息之间的对应关系),那么终端设备可以根据资源与TRP的标识信息之间的对应关系确定随后接收的TA为针对哪个TRP的TA。也就是说,终端设备可以根据第三资源和第一TRP的对应关系,确定第一TA对应于第一TRP,以及根据第一资源和第二TRP的对应关系,确定第二TA对应于第二TRP。
可选的,在另一种实施方式中,若终端设备在配置mTRP传输的阶段仅知道被配置的一个或者多个资源,而不知道上述一个或多个资源中各个资源分别是为哪个TRP而配置(即终端设备不知道各个资源与TRP的标识信息之间的对应关系),那么网络设备可以在向终端设备发送指示第一TA的信息和第二TA的 信息的同时,还可以向终端设备发送指示TRP相关的身份标识,因此,终端设备可以确定接收到的第一TA对应第一TRP,第二TA对应第二TRP。也就是说,第三消息中包括第一TA与第一TRP的对应关系,以及第二TA与第二TRP的对应关系;其中,第一TA与第一TRP的对应关系包括用于指示第一TA的信息和第一TRP的标识信息,第二TA和第二TRP的对应关系包括用于指示第二TA的信息和第二TRP的标识信息,因此,终端设备可以根据第一TA和第一TRP的对应关系,确定第一TA对应于第一TRP,以及根据第二TA和第二TRP的对应关系,确定第二TA对应于第二TRP。或者,第四消息中包括第一TA与第一TRP的对应关系,其中第一TA与第一TRP的对应关系包括用于指示第一TA的信息和第一TRP的标识信息,第五消息中还包括第二TA与第二TRP的对应关系,其中第二TA与第二TRP的对应关系包括用于指示第二TA的信息和第二TRP的标识信息,因此,终端设备可以根据第一TA和第一TRP的对应关系,确定第一TA对应于第一TRP,以及根据第二TA和第二TRP的对应关系,确定第二TA对应于第二TRP。
可选的,在一些可行的实施方式中,当终端设备基于上述步骤S801~S803成功获取第二TRP的第二TA之后,终端设备还可以对各个TRP对应的TA进行更新维护。
S804、终端设备和网络设备对TRP对应的TA进行更新维护。
这里,针对S804的理解可参见上述图6中针对步骤S604的描述,在此不再赘述。
可选的,在一些可行的实施方式中,当任意一个定时器超时时,终端设备和网络设备还需要对超时的定时器所维护的TA进行失效处理:
S805、终端设备和网络设备对失效的TA进行处理。
这里,针对S805的理解可参见上述图6中针对步骤S605的描述,在此不再赘述。
在本申请实施例中,对于Intra-cell mTRP场景,终端设备可以同时获取第一TRP的初始TA,以及获取第二TRP的初始TA,并更新维护多个TRP的TA。基于此,终端设备能够以准确的上行发送时间,向不同的TRP发送信号,减少网络侧的信号干扰,提升通信可靠性。
在另一个实施例中,针对Inter-cell mTRP场景的情况b进行说明,在Inter-cell mTRP场景中,第一TRP和第二TRP对应不同的小区,具体地,第一TRP对应小区1,第二TRP对应小区2。其中,可以将为小区1提供服务的网络设备记作网络设备1,为小区2提供服务的网络设备记作网络设备2。可选的,在一些可能的部署场景中,小区1和小区2也可以为同站部署的两个小区,即网络设备1和网络设备2为同一个设备,因此,后文步骤描述中,两个网络设备之间的交互信令与流程,在同站部署场景中可以理解为网络设备内部的实现。
请参见图9,图9是本申请实施例提供的通信方法的另一流程示意图。其中,步骤900~步骤905的执行主体为终端设备或者网络设备(例如网络设备1或网络设备2),或者为终端设备或网络设备中的芯片。以下以终端设备和网络设备为方法的执行主体为例进行说明。
需要说明的是,图9所示实施例主要描述了Inter-cell mTRP场景的情况b下TA管理。
如图9所示,该通信方法包括如下步骤S900~步骤S905,其中步骤S900~步骤S903主要为针对Inter-cell mTRP场景中情况b下的初始TA获取描述,步骤S904主要为针对Inter-cell mTRP场景中情况b下TA更新调整的描述,步骤S905主要为针对Inter-cell mTRP场景中情况b下TA失效后的行为处理的描述。其中:
S900、网络设备1与网络设备2进行信息交互,以获取用于mTRP传输的资源。
这里,针对S900的理解可参见上述图7中针对步骤S700的描述,在此不再赘述。
S901、网络设备1向终端设备发送第一TRP对应的第三资源的配置信息和第二TRP对应的第一资源的配置信息。
这里,针对S901的理解可参见上述图8中针对步骤S801的描述,只需要将步骤S801中的网络设备替换为网络设备1理解即可,在此不再赘述。
S902、终端设备使用第三资源向第一TRP发送用于确定第一TRP的第一TA的信息,以及使用第一资源向第二TRP发送用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息。
这里,针对S902的理解可参见上述图8中针对步骤S802的描述,在此不再赘述。
S903、终端设备接收来自网络设备(网络设备1和/或网络设备2)的指示第一TA的信息和指示第二TA的信息。
这里,终端设备接收来自网络设备2的指示第一TA的信息和指示第二TA的信息可以理解为:网络设备1将计算出的第一TA,先通过站间交互(或网络设备内部实现),告知网络设备2,再由网络设备2 通过小区2的通信资源将接收到的第一TA的信息和计算出的第二TA的信息发送给终端设备。
其中,终端设备接收来自网络设备1的指示第一TA的信息和指示第二TA的信息可以理解为:网络设备2将计算出的第二TA,先通过站间交互(或网络设备内部实现),告知网络设备1,再由网络设备1通过小区1的通信资源将接收到的第二TA和计算出的第一TA的信息告知终端设备。
其中,终端设备接收来自网络设备1和网络设备2的指示第一TA的信息和指示第二TA的信息可以理解为:网络设备1将计算出的第一TA告知终端设备,网络设备2将计算出的第二TA告知终端设备。
S904、终端设备和网络设备(网络设备1或网络设备2)对TRP对应的TA的更新维护。
这里,针对S904的理解可参见上述图8中针对步骤S804的描述,不同之处在于,网络设备1用于对第一TRP对应的TA(即第一TA)进行更新维护,网络设备2用于对第二TRP对应的TA(即第二TA)进行更新维护。
S905、终端设备和网络设备(网络设备1或网络设备2)对失效的TA的进行处理。
这里,针对S905的理解可参见上述图8中针对步骤S805的描述,不同之处在于,网络设备1用于对第一TRP对应的TA(即第一TA)进行更新维护,网络设备2用于对第二TRP对应的TA(即第二TA)进行更新维护。
在本申请实施例中,对于Inter-cell mTRP场景,终端设备可以同时获取第一TRP的初始TA,以及获取第二TRP的初始TA,并更新维护多个TRP的TA。基于此,终端设备能够以准确的上行发送时间,向不同的TRP发送信号,减少网络侧的信号干扰,提升通信可靠性。
需要说明的是,针对Intra-cell mTRP场景中情况a下的TA管理,还可以有如下图10所示的实现方式,其中图10对应的实施例可视为图6所示实施例的并列方案。
请参见图10,图10是本申请实施例提供的通信方法的另一流程示意图。其中,步骤1001~步骤1003的执行主体为终端设备或者网络设备,或者为终端设备或网络设备中的芯片。以下以终端设备和网络设备为方法的执行主体为例进行说明。
需要说明的是,图10中涉及的终端设备已获取了与第一TRP通信的第一TA,即图10所示实施例主要描述了另一种Intra-cell mTRP场景的情况a下TA管理。
如图10所示,该通信方法包括如下步骤S1001~步骤S1003,其中步骤S1001主要为针对Intra-cell mTRP场景的情况a下的初始TA获取描述,步骤S1002主要为针对Intra-cell mTRP场景的情况a下TA更新调整的描述,步骤S1003主要为针对Intra-cell mTRP场景的情况a下TA失效后的行为处理的描述。其中:
S1001、网络设备向终端设备发送mTRP传输的配置消息,该mTRP传输的配置消息包括指示第二TA的信息。相应地,终端设备接收来自网络设备的多传输接收点mTRP传输的配置消息。
在一个示例中,当网络设备通过定位的方式获知终端设备与第二TRP的距离时,网络设备可直接估算出第二TA的值。具体地,网络设备通过终端设备与第二TRP的距离,计算该终端设备发送的上行信号在空间中的传播时间,进而估算出第二TA的值。
再一个示例中,若网络设备已知第二TRP服务的地理区域范围较小,那么网络设备可以确定第二TA的值为0。具体地,在第二TRP服务的地理区域内,多个终端设备均使用TA值为0发送上行消息,多个终端设备的上行信号到达第二TRP的时差较小,产生的干扰也较小,网络设备仍可以正确解码出多个终端设备发送的上行消息。
再一个示例中,当网络设备已知终端设备距离第一TRP和第二TRP的距离接近时,网络设备可指示终端设备使用第一TRP的TA与第二TRP进行通信,即第二TA的值与第一TA的值相同。例如,网络设备可以向终端设备发送一个具体的值,该值与第一TA的值相同;又例如,网络设备可以向终端设备发送一个沿用指示,该沿用指示用于指示终端设备沿用第一TA作为第二TA。
通常来说,网络设备可以向mTRP传输的配置消息,该mTRP传输的配置消息中包括指示第二TA的信息,其中,第二TA为第二TRP对应的TA,第二TA用于终端设备与第二TRP通信。其中,本申请中涉及的指示第二TA的信息包括以下任意一项:第二TA的值、或第一TA的值与第二TA的值之间的差值信息、或沿用其他TA的指示信息。
需要说明的是,在步骤S1001之前,网络设备已经向终端设备发送了第一TRP对应的第一TA,第一TA用于终端设备与第一TRP通信。也就是说,在步骤S1001之前,终端设备已获取与第一TRP通信的第一TA。
可选的,在一种实现中,mTRP传输的配置消息包括指示第二TA的信息可以理解为:mTRP传输的 配置消息包括第二TRP的标识信息和指示第二TA的信息。因此,终端设备可以根据接收到的第二TRP的标识信息,确定接收到的第二TA为第二TRP对应的TA。
在另一实现中,网络设备向终端设备发送的mTRP传输的配置消息中也可以不包括TRP的标识信息,而只包括指示第二TA的信息,也就是说,终端设备通过mTRP传输的配置消息,只知道第二TA的信息,而不知道该第二TA具体对应哪个TRP,该种情况下,如果终端设备想知道第二TA是针对哪个TRP的,那么可以根据mTRP传输的配置消息与TRP对应的参数名称之间的关联关系确定,例如参数名1关联的mTRP传输的配置与TRP1对应,参数名2关联的mTRP传输的配置与TRP2对应。因此,终端设备可以根据参数名称与TRP之间的关联关系,确定第二TA对应第二TRP。或者,还可以根据mTRP传输的配置消息中的资源与TRP对应的参数名称之间的关联关系确定,例如参数名1关联的资源配置与TRP1对应,参数名2关联的资源配置与TRP2对应。因此,终端设备可以根据参数名称与TRP之间的关联关系,确定第二TA对应第二TRP。
S1002、终端设备和网络设备对TRP对应的TA的更新维护。
这里,针对S1002的理解可参见上述图6中针对步骤S604的描述,在此不再进行赘述。
S1003、终端设备和网络设备对失效的TA的进行处理。
这里,针对S1003的理解可参见上述图6中针对步骤S605的描述,在此不再进行赘述。
在本申请实施例中,对于Intra-cell mTRP场景,终端设备在已获取与第一TRP通信的第一TA的前提下,还可以基于接收到的mTRP传输的配置消息中携带的指示第二TA的信息,确定第二TRP的初始TA。进一步地,终端设备和网络设备后续还可以更新维护多个TRP的TA。基于此,终端设备能够以准确的上行发送时间,向不同的TRP发送信号,减少网络侧的信号干扰,提升通信可靠性。
需要说明的是,针对Inter-cell mTRP场景中情况a下的TA管理,还可以有如下图11所示的实现方式,其中图11对应的实施例可视为图7所示实施例的并列方案。
请参见图11,图11是本申请实施例提供的通信方法的另一流程示意图。其中,步骤1100~步骤1103的执行主体为终端设备或者网络设备(例如网络设备1或网络设备2),或者为终端设备或网络设备中的芯片。以下以终端设备和网络设备为方法的执行主体为例进行说明。
需要说明的是,图11中涉及的终端设备已获取了与第一TRP通信的第一TA,即图11所示实施例主要描述了Inter-cell mTRP场景的情况a下TA管理。
如图11所示,该通信方法包括如下步骤S1100~步骤S1103,其中步骤S1100~步骤S1101主要为针对Inter-cell mTRP场景中情况b下的初始TA获取描述,步骤S1102主要为针对Inter-cell mTRP场景中情况b下TA更新调整的描述,步骤S1103主要为针对Inter-cell mTRP场景中情况b下TA失效后的行为处理的描述。其中:
S1100、网络设备1与网络设备2进行信息交互,以获取用于mTRP传输的资源。
具体地,步骤S1100可包括:(1)网络设备1向网络设备2发送一条请求消息,该请求消息用于请求小区2为终端设备分配用于mTRP传输的资源;(2)网络设备2向网络设备1回复一条响应消息,该响应消息中包括小区2为终端设备分配的用于mTRP传输的资源,即该响应消息中包括mTRP传输的配置信息,其中该mTRP传输的配置信息中包括第二TA。
可理解的,该步骤S1100为可选步骤,例如当小区1和小区2为同站部署时,即网络设备1和网络设备2为同一个网络设备时,信息交互可由该设备的内部信息交换实现。
S1101、终端设备获取来自网络设备1的mTRP传输的配置消息,该mTRP传输的配置消息包括指示第二TA的信息。
这里,针对S1101的理解可参见上述图10中针对步骤S1001的描述,只需要将步骤S1001中的网络设备替换为网络设备1理解即可,在此不再赘述。
需要说明的是,这里步骤S1101中网络设备1向终端设备发送的mTRP传输的配置消息可以理解为是网络设备1基于S1100中的mTRP传输的配置信息生成的消息。
可选的,在一些可行的实施方式中,当终端设备基于上述步骤S601~S603成功获取第二TRP的第二TA之后,终端设备还可以对各个TRP对应的TA进行更新维护。
S1102、终端设备和网络设备(网络设备1或网络设备2)对TRP对应的TA进行更新维护。
这里,针对S1102的理解可参见上述图7中针对步骤S704的描述,在此不再赘述。
可选的,在一些可行的实施方式中,当任意一个定时器超时时,终端设备和网络设备还需要对超时的 定时器所维护的TA进行失效处理:
S1103、终端设备和网络设备(网络设备1或网络设备2)对失效的TA进行处理。
这里,针对S1103的理解可参见上述图7中针对步骤S705的描述,在此不再赘述。
在本申请实施例中,对于Inter-cell mTRP场景,终端设备在已获取与第一TRP通信的第一TA的前提下,还可以基于接收到的mTRP传输的配置消息中携带的指示第二TA的信息,确定第二TRP的初始TA。进一步地,终端设备和网络设备后续还可以更新维护多个TRP的TA。基于此,终端设备能够以准确的上行发送时间,向不同的TRP发送信号,减少网络侧的信号干扰,提升通信可靠性。
下面将结合图12~图15对本申请提供的通信装置进行详细说明。
请参见图12,图12是本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图。图12所示的通信装置可以用于执行上述图5~图11所描述的方法实施例中终端设备的部分或全部功能。该装置可以是终端设备,也可以是终端设备中的装置,或者是能够和终端设备匹配使用的装置。其中,该通信装置还可以为芯片系统。图12所示的通信装置可以包括收发单元1201和处理单元1202。其中,处理单元1202,用于进行数据处理。收发单元1201集成有接收单元和发送单元。收发单元1201也可以称为通信单元。或者,也可将收发单元1201拆分为接收单元和发送单元。下文的处理单元1202和收发单元1201同理,下文不再赘述。其中:
在一种实现中:
收发单元1201,用于获取来自网络设备的第一资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息;
处理单元1202,用于根据所述用于指示获取TA的信息,通过所述收发单元1201使用所述第一资源向所述网络设备发送用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息;
所述收发单元1201,用于接收来自所述网络设备的指示所述第二TA的信息,所述第二TA用于所述终端设备与所述第二TRP通信。
在另一种实现中:
收发单元1201,用于接收来自网络设备的第一TRP对应的第三资源的配置信息和第二TRP对应的第一资源的配置信息;
所述收发单元1201,用于使用所述第三资源向所述第一TRP发送用于确定所述第一TRP的第一TA的信息,以及使用所述第一资源向所述第二TRP发送用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息;
所述收发单元1201,用于接收来自所述网络设备的指示所述第一TA的信息和指示所述第二TA的信息。
在另一种实现中:
收发单元1201,用于接收来自网络设备的多传输接收点mTRP传输的配置消息,所述mTRP传输的配置消息包括指示第二TA的信息,所述第二TA为第二TRP对应的TA,所述指示所述第二TA的信息包括以下任意一项:所述第二TA的值、或所述第一TA的值与所述第二TA的值之间的差值信息;
处理单元1202,用于使用所述第二TA与所述第二TRP通信。
该通信装置的其他可能的实现方式,可参见上述图5~图11对应的方法实施例中对终端设备功能的相关描述,在此不赘述。
请参见图13,图13是本申请实施例提供的另一种通信装置的结构示意图。图13所示的通信装置可以用于执行上述图5~图11所描述的方法实施例中网络设备的部分或全部功能。该装置可以是网络设备,也可以是网络设备中的装置,或者是能够和网络设备匹配使用的装置。其中,该通信装置还可以为芯片系统。图13所示的通信装置可以包括收发单元1301。其中:
在一种实现中:
收发单元1301,用于向终端设备发送第一传输接收点TRP对应的第一定时提前TA,所述第一TA用于所述终端设备与所述第一TRP通信;
所述收发单元1301,用于向所述终端设备发送第一资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息;
所述收发单元1301,用于接收所述终端设备响应于所述用于指示获取TA的信息,使用所述第一资源发送的用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息;
所述收发单元1301,用于向所述终端设备发送指示所述第二TA的信息,所述第二TA用于所述终端设备与所述第二TRP通信。
在另一种实现中:
收发单元1301,用于向终端设备发送第一TRP对应的第三资源的配置信息和第二TRP对应的第一资源的配置信息;
所述收发单元1301,用于通过所述第一TRP接收来自所述终端设备的用于确定所述第一TRP的第一TA的信息,以及通过所述第二TRP接收来自所述终端设备的用于确定所述第二TRP的第二TA的信息;
所述收发单元1301,用于向所述终端设备发送指示所述第一TA的信息和指示所述第二TA的信息。
在另一种实现中:
收发单元1301,用于向终端设备发送第一传输接收点TRP对应的第一定时提前TA,所述第一TA用于所述终端设备与所述第一TRP通信;
所述收发单元1301,用于向终端设备发送多传输接收点mTRP传输的配置消息,所述mTRP传输的配置消息包括指示第二TA的信息,所述第二TA为第二TRP对应的TA,所述指示所述第二TA的信息包括以下任意一项:所述第二TA的值、或所述第一TA的值与所述第二TA的值之间的差值信息,所述第二TA用于所述终端设备与所述第二TRP通信。
该通信装置的其他可能的实现方式,可参见上述图5~图11对应的方法实施例中对网络设备功能的相关描述,在此不赘述。
请参见图14,图14是本申请实施例提供的另一种通信装置的结构示意图。如图14所示,该通信装置可以为本申请实施例中描述的接入网设备,该接入网设备包括:基带装置141,射频装置142、天线143。在上行方向上,射频装置142通过天线143接收终端设备发送的信息,将终端设备发送的信息发送给基带装置141进行处理。在下行方向上,基带装置141对终端设备的信息进行处理,并发送给射频装置142,射频装置142对终端设备的信息进行处理后经过天线143发送给终端设备。
基带装置141包括一个或多个处理单元1411,存储单元1412和接口1414。其中处理单元1411用于支持网络设备执行上述方法实施例中网络设备的功能。存储单元1412用于存储软件程序和/或数据。接口1414用于与射频装置142交互信息,该接口包括接口电路,用于信息的输入和输出。在一种实现中,所述处理单元为集成电路,例如一个或多个专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC),或,一个或多个数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP),或,一个或者多个现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA),或者这些类集成电路的组合。这些集成电路可以集成在一起,构成芯片。存储单元1412与处理单元1411可以位于同一个芯片中,即片内存储元件。或者存储单元1412与处理单元1411也可以为与处理单元1411处于不同芯片上,即片外存储元件。所述存储单元1412可以是一个存储器,也可以是多个存储器或存储元件的统称。
接入网设备可以通过一个或多个处理单元调度程序的形式实现上述方法实施例中的部分或全部步骤。例如实现图5~图11中网络设备的相应的功能。所述一个或多个处理单元可以支持同一种制式的无线接入技术,也可以支持不同种制式的无线接入制式。
请参见图15,图15是本申请实施例提供的另一种通信装置的结构示意图。如图15所示,该通信装置可以为本申请实施例中描述的终端设备,为了便于说明,图15仅示出了终端设备1500的主要部件。如图15所示,终端设备1500包括处理器、存储器、控制电路、天线以及输入输出装置。处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,以及对整个终端设备1500进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据。存储器主要用于存储软件程序和数据。控制电路主要用于基带信号与射频信号的转换以及对射频信号的处理。天线主要用于收发电磁波形式的射频信号。输入输出装置,例如触摸屏,显示屏,麦克风,键盘等主要用于接收用户输入的数据以及对用户输出数据。
以终端设备1500为手机为例,当终端设备1500开机后,处理器可以读取存储单元中的软件程序,解释并执行软件程序的指令,处理软件程序的数据。当需要通过无线发送数据时,处理器对待发送的数据进行基带处理后,输出基带信号至控制电路,控制电路将基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式向外发送。当有数据发送到终端设备1500时,控制电路通过天线接收到射频信号,将射频信号转换为基带信号,并将基带信号输出至处理器,处理器将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。
本领域技术人员可以理解,为了便于说明,图15仅示出了一个存储器和处理器。在一些实施例中,终端设备1500可以包括多个处理器和存储器。存储器也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等,本申请实施例对此不做限制。
作为一种可选的实现方式,处理器可以包括基带处理器和中央处理器,基带处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,中央处理器主要用于对整个终端设备1500进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软 件程序的数据。图15中的处理器集成了基带处理器和中央处理器的功能,本领域技术人员可以理解,基带处理器和中央处理器也可以是各自独立的处理器,通过总线等技术互联。终端设备1500可以包括多个基带处理器以适应不同的网络制式,终端设备1500可以包括多个中央处理器以增强其处理能力,终端设备1500的各个部件可以通过各种总线连接。所述基带处理器也可以表述为基带处理电路或者基带处理芯片。所述中央处理器也可以表述为中央处理电路或者中央处理芯片。对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理的功能可以内置在处理器中,也可以以软件程序的形式存储在存储单元中,由处理器执行软件程序以实现基带处理功能。
在一个例子中,可以将具有收发功能的天线和控制电路视为终端设备1500的收发单元1510,将具有处理功能的处理器视为终端设备1500的处理单元1520。如图15所示,终端设备1500包括收发单元1510和处理单元1520。收发单元也可以称为收发器、收发机、收发装置等。可选的,可以将收发单元1510中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收单元,将收发单元1510中用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送单元,即收发单元1510包括接收单元和发送单元。示例性的,接收单元也可以称为接收机、接收器、接收电路等,发送单元可以称为发射机、发射器或者发射电路等。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令,当其在处理器上运行时,上述方法实施例的方法流程得以实现。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品,当所述计算机程序产品在处理器上运行时,上述方法实施例的方法流程得以实现。
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及步骤,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的计算机可读存储介质,可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质。以此为例但不限于:计算机可读介质可以包括随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦可编程只读存储器(electrically erasable programmable read only memory,EEPROM)、紧凑型光盘只读存储器(compact disc read-only memory,CD-ROM)、通用串行总线闪存盘(universal serial bus flash disk)、移动硬盘、或其他光盘存储、磁盘存储介质或者其他磁存储设备、或者能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质。另外,通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的RAM可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM,SLDRAM)或直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM,DR RAM)。
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请实施例的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请实施例揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请实施例的保护范围之内。因此,本申请实施例的保护范围应所述以权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (30)

  1. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法适用于终端设备已获取与第一传输接收点TRP通信的第一定时提前TA,所述方法包括:
    获取来自网络设备的第一资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息;
    根据所述用于指示获取TA的信息,使用所述第一资源向所述网络设备发送用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息;
    接收来自所述网络设备的指示所述第二TA的信息,所述第二TA用于所述终端设备与所述第二TRP通信。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述获取来自网络设备的第一资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息,包括:
    获取来自所述网络设备的多传输接收点mTRP传输的配置消息,所述mTRP传输的配置消息包括所述第一资源的配置信息和所述用于指示获取TA的信息。
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述获取来自网络设备的第一资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息,包括:
    获取来自所述网络设备的多传输接收点mTRP传输的配置消息,所述mTRP传输的配置消息包括所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系以及所述用于指示获取TA的信息,所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系包括所述第一资源的配置信息和所述第二TRP的标识信息;
    所述方法还包括:
    根据所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系,确定所述第二TA对应于所述第二TRP。
  4. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述获取来自网络设备的第一资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息,包括:
    接收来自所述网络设备的第一消息,所述第一消息包括一个或者多个资源的配置信息,所述一个或者多个资源包括所述第一资源;
    接收来自所述网络设备的第二消息,所述第二消息包括用于指示获取TA的信息。
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一消息为mTRP传输的配置消息,所述第二消息为物理下行控制信道命令PDCCH order。
  6. 根据权利要求4或5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一消息还包括所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系,所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系包括所述第一资源的配置信息和第二TRP的标识信息;
    所述方法还包括:
    根据所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系,确定所述第二TA对应于所述第二TRP。
  7. 根据权利要求4或5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二消息还包括所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系,所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系包括所述第一资源的指示信息和所述第二TRP的标识信息;
    所述方法还包括:
    根据所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系,确定所述第二TA对应于所述第二TRP。
  8. 根据权利要求1或2或4或5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述接收来自所述网络设备的用于指示所述第二TA的信息,包括:
    接收来自所述网络设备的所述第二TA和所述第二TRP的对应关系,所述第二TA和所述第二TRP的对应关系包括用于指示所述第二TA的信息和所述第二TRP的标识信息;
    所述方法还包括:
    根据所述第二TA和所述第二TRP的对应关系,确定所述第二TA对应于所述第二TRP。
  9. 根据权利要求1-8任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一资源为以下任意一项:
    波束、随机接入的资源、或探测参考信号SRS的资源。
  10. 根据权利要求1-9任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:
    接收来自所述网络设备的调整命令,所述调整命令中包括所述第二TRP的标识信息和所述第二TRP对应的TA更新信息,所述TA更新信息用于更新所述第二TA。
  11. 根据权利要求2或3或5-9任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述mTRP传输的配置信息中还包括以下所述第二TRP对应的第二资源的配置信息中的至少一项:
    物理下行控制信道PDCCH资源的配置信息,物理上行控制信道PUCCH资源的配置信息,用于半静态信道状态信息上报的物理上行共享信道PUSCH资源的配置信息,下行分配资源的配置信息,上行授权资源的配置信息,波束和/或波束集的配置信息,上行参考信号对应的资源的配置信息。
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:
    使用所述第二资源接收来自所述网络设备的调整命令,所述调整命令中包括所述第二TRP对应的TA更新信息,所述TA更新信息用于更新所述第二TA;
    根据所述第二资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系,确定所述调整命令对应于所述第二TRP,所述第二资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系包括所述第二资源的配置信息和所述第二TRP的标识信息。
  13. 根据权利要求11或12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一TRP对应第一定时器,所述第二TRP对应第二定时器;
    所述方法还包括:
    当所述第一定时器未超时,且所述第二定时器超时时,执行以下操作中的至少一项操作:
    清空所述第二TRP对应的混合自动重传请求HARQ进程的缓存;
    释放所述第二TRP对应的PUCCH资源,和/或,上行参考信号对应的资源;
    清空所述第二TRP对应的预配置的下行分配资源和上行授权资源;
    清空所述第二TRP对应的用于半静态信道状态信息上报关联的PUSCH资源;
    维持所述第二TA;
    根据第一TA向所述网络设备发送指示信息,所述指示信息用于指示所述第二TA失效。
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据第一TA向所述网络设备发送指示信息,包括:
    当待发送数据的数据量大于或者等于第一阈值时,所述根据所述第一TA向所述网络设备发送所述指示信息。
  15. 根据权利要求1-14任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一TRP和所述第二TRP对应同一小区,或者,所述第一TRP和所述第二TRP对应不同的小区。
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一TRP和所述第二TRP对应不同的小区,所述第一TRP对应源小区,所述第二TRP对应目标小区;
    所述接收来自所述网络设备的指示所述第二TA的信息之后,所述方法还包括:
    接收来自所述源小区的切换命令;
    根据所述切换命令从所述源小区切换至所述目标小区,所述切换命令指示在所述目标小区使用所述第二TA。
  17. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法应用于网络设备,包括:
    向终端设备发送第一传输接收点TRP对应的第一定时提前TA,所述第一TA用于所述终端设备与所述第一TRP通信;
    向所述终端设备发送第一资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息;
    接收所述终端设备响应于所述用于指示获取TA的信息,使用所述第一资源发送的用于确定第二TRP的第二TA的信息;
    向所述终端设备发送指示所述第二TA的信息,所述第二TA用于所述终端设备与所述第二TRP通信。
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的方法,其特征在于,所述向所述终端设备发送第一资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息,包括:
    向所述终端设备发送多传输接收点mTRP传输的配置消息,所述mTRP传输的配置消息包括第一资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息。
  19. 根据权利要求17或18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述向所述终端设备发送第一资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息,包括:
    向所述终端设备发送多传输接收点mTRP传输的配置消息,所述mTRP传输的配置消息包括所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系以及所述用于指示获取TA的信息,所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系包括所述第一资源的配置信息和所述第二TRP的标识信息。
  20. 根据权利要求17所述的方法,其特征在于,所述向所述终端设备发送第一资源的配置信息和用于指示获取TA的信息,包括:
    向所述终端设备发送第一消息,所述第一消息包括一个或者多个资源的配置信息,所述一个或者多个 资源包括所述第一资源;
    向所述终端设备发送第二消息,所述第二消息包括用于指示获取TA的信息。
  21. 根据权利要求20所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一消息为mTRP传输的配置消息,所述第二消息为物理下行控制信道命令PDCCH order。
  22. 根据权利要求20或21所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一消息还包括所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系,所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系包括所述第一资源的配置信息和第二TRP的标识信息。
  23. 根据权利要求20或21所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二消息还包括所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系,所述第一资源和所述第二TRP的对应关系包括所述第一资源的指示信息和所述第二TRP的标识信息。
  24. 根据权利要求17或18或20或21所述的方法,其特征在于,所述向所述终端设备发送指示所述第二TA的信息,包括:
    向所述终端设备发送所述第二TA和所述第二TRP的对应关系,所述第二TA和所述第二TRP的对应关系包括用于指示所述第二TA的信息和所述第二TRP的标识信息。
  25. 根据权利要求17-24任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一资源为以下任意一项:
    波束、随机接入的资源、或探测参考信号SRS的资源。
  26. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括用于执行权利要求1-16中任一项所述方法的单元或模块。
  27. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括用于执行权利要求17-25中任一项所述方法的单元或模块。
  28. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:
    一个或多个处理器,一个或多个收发器和一个或多个存储器;
    其中,所述一个或多个存储器用于存储计算机程序,所述一个或多个处理器和所述一个或多个收发器用于执行存储于所述一个或多个存储器中的计算机程序,以使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求1-16,或者,权利要求17-25中任一项所述的方法。
  29. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述存储介质中存储有计算机程序或指令,当所述计算机程序或指令被计算机执行时,实现如权利要求1-16,或者,权利要求17-25中任一项所述的方法。
  30. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,包括计算机程序代码,当所述计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时,以实现权利要求1-16,或者,权利要求17-25中任一项所述的方法。
PCT/CN2023/109235 2022-08-11 2023-07-26 通信方法及相关装置 WO2024032371A1 (zh)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202210963748.6A CN117641384A (zh) 2022-08-11 2022-08-11 通信方法及相关装置
CN202210963748.6 2022-08-11

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024032371A1 true WO2024032371A1 (zh) 2024-02-15

Family

ID=89850722

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2023/109235 WO2024032371A1 (zh) 2022-08-11 2023-07-26 通信方法及相关装置

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN117641384A (zh)
WO (1) WO2024032371A1 (zh)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20200162289A1 (en) * 2017-05-04 2020-05-21 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for transmitting and receiving signal by means of beam in wireless communication system, and apparatus for said method
WO2021003618A1 (zh) * 2019-07-05 2021-01-14 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 一种时间提前的获取方法、网络设备、终端设备
CN112534898A (zh) * 2018-08-10 2021-03-19 高通股份有限公司 用于多个传送接收点的多定时提前设计
CN114287164A (zh) * 2019-09-30 2022-04-05 华为技术有限公司 终端的定时提前量ta处理的方法和装置
CN114762400A (zh) * 2019-12-12 2022-07-15 高通股份有限公司 用于多发送接收点操作的定时提前信令

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20200162289A1 (en) * 2017-05-04 2020-05-21 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for transmitting and receiving signal by means of beam in wireless communication system, and apparatus for said method
CN112534898A (zh) * 2018-08-10 2021-03-19 高通股份有限公司 用于多个传送接收点的多定时提前设计
WO2021003618A1 (zh) * 2019-07-05 2021-01-14 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 一种时间提前的获取方法、网络设备、终端设备
CN114287164A (zh) * 2019-09-30 2022-04-05 华为技术有限公司 终端的定时提前量ta处理的方法和装置
CN114762400A (zh) * 2019-12-12 2022-07-15 高通股份有限公司 用于多发送接收点操作的定时提前信令

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN117641384A (zh) 2024-03-01

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP3509384B1 (en) Communication method, device and storage medium
CN107431544B (zh) 用于设备到设备通信的方法和装置
WO2018137284A1 (zh) 一种传输寻呼消息的方法及装置
EP3439422B1 (en) Device and method supporting access to secondary cells for dual connectivity and handover
WO2021018283A1 (zh) 通信方法和通信装置
US20150119048A1 (en) Method and apparatus for perceiving access between terminal and small cell
US20230362750A1 (en) Data transmission method and apparatus
JP7441960B2 (ja) 情報伝送方法、端末機器及びネットワーク機器
WO2022135602A1 (zh) 一种通信方法和装置
US20230354250A1 (en) Communication system
WO2022022661A1 (en) Method and apparatus for radio connection
CN117480815A (zh) 用于非地面网络卫星切换的方法、终端设备及网络设备
CN117397292A (zh) 用于非地面网络卫星切换的方法、终端设备及网络设备
WO2021066711A1 (en) Radio network node, user equipment (ue) and methods performed in a wireless communication network
US20230164746A1 (en) Random access resource selection method and related apparatus
EP4373198A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
EP3917274A1 (en) Method and apparatus for radio communication
WO2024032371A1 (zh) 通信方法及相关装置
JP2018523382A (ja) 多重接続性
WO2022063012A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及通信装置
WO2023133839A1 (zh) 通信方法和设备
WO2023065130A1 (zh) 上行定时的调整方法以及装置
US20240064584A1 (en) Resource processing method and apparatus
CN115413045B (zh) 信息传输方法、终端设备和网络设备
WO2023108476A1 (zh) 通信方法及装置

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23851593

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1